Volvo XC60 2009 Owners Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Volvo XC60 2009 Owners Manual PDF
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T09:01:09+02:00; Page 1
evastarck
VOLVO XC60
OWNERS MANUAL
DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your
Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of
you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the
world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current
safety and environmental requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend
that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions
and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.
This insert is printed on recycled paper.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 1
evastarck
Table of contents
2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
00 00 Introduction
Important information................................. 6
Volvo and the environment....................... 10
01 01 Safety
Seatbelts .................................................. 16
Airbag system (SRS - Airbag)................... 19
Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 22
Side airbags (SIPS bags) ......................... 24
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................... 26
WHIPS ...................................................... 27
Roll-Over Protection System - ROPS....... 29
When the systems deploy ........................ 30
Safety mode.............................................. 31
Child safety............................................... 32 02 02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade.................. 42
Battery replacement, remote control key/ PCC*......................................................... 47
Keyless drive*............................................ 48
Locking/unlocking..................................... 50
Child safety locks...................................... 55
Alarm*........................................................ 56
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 2
evastarck
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3
03 03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls.......................... 62
Key positions............................................ 70
Seats......................................................... 72
Steering wheel.......................................... 76
Lighting..................................................... 77
Wipers and washing.................................. 86
Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 89
Power panorama roof*.............................. 93
Starting the engine.................................... 95
Starting the engine external battery....... 97
Gearboxes................................................. 98
All-wheel drive AWD*........................... 102
Foot brake............................................... 103
Hill Descent Control - HDC*.................... 105
Parking brake.......................................... 107
HomeLink EU*....................................... 110
04 04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages............................. 116
Climate control........................................ 121
Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas- senger compartment heater*.................. 129
Fuel-driven additional heater*................. 132
Audio system.......................................... 133
Trip computer......................................... 147
Compass*............................................... 149
DSTC Stability and traction control sys- tem.......................................................... 150
Adapting driving characteristics............. 151
Cruise control*........................................ 152
Adaptive cruise control*.......................... 153
Distance Alert.......................................... 159
City Safety........................................... 162
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*........ 167
Driver Alert System DAC*..................... 173
Driver Alert System - LDW*..................... 176
Park assist syst*...................................... 179
Parking camera*...................................... 182
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System. . 185
Comfort inside the passenger compart- ment........................................................ 189
Bluetooth handsfree*.............................. 192
04 Built-in phone*........................................ 197
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 3
evastarck
Table of contents
4
05 05 During your journey
Recommendations during driving........... 204
Refuelling................................................ 206
Fuel......................................................... 207
Loading................................................... 210
Cargo area.............................................. 211
Warning triangle...................................... 215
Driving with a trailer................................ 216
Towing and recovery.............................. 222 06 06 Maintenance and
specifications
Engine compartment............................... 226
Lamps..................................................... 231
Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 238
Battery..................................................... 240
Fuses....................................................... 243
Wheels and tyres.................................... 251
Car care.................................................. 263
Type designations................................... 267
Specifications......................................... 269
Type approval......................................... 276 07 07 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 277
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 4
evastarck
Table of contents
5
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 5
evastarck
Introduction
Important information
6
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey. This will give you the opportunity
to familiarise yourself with new functions, to
see how best to handle the car in different sit-
uations, and to make the best use of all the
car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the manual.
The equipment described in the owner's man-
ual is not present in all cars . In addition to
standard equipment, this manual also
describes options (factory fitted equipment)
and certain accessories (retrofitted extra
equipment). If you are uncertain over what is
standard, an option or an accessory then con-
tact your Volvo dealer.
Volvo cars are adapted for the varying require-
ments of different markets, as well as for
national or local legal requirements and regu-
lations.
The specifications, design features and illus-
trations in this owner's manual are not binding.
We reserve the right to make modifications
without prior notice.
Volvo Car Corporation
Option All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk .
The range of options/accessories for the dif-
ferent car models varies depending on the mar-
ket. The majority of options are factory fitted
and cannot be retrofitted, accessories are ret-
rofitted.
Contact your authorised Volvo dealer for more
information.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts advise of a risk of personal injury.
IMPORTANT
Important texts advise of a risk of material damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam- ple.
Footnote There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the text
that it refers to via a number. If the footnote
refers to text in a table then letters are used
instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts There are displays in the car that show text
messages. These text messages are high-
lighted in the owner's manual by means of the
text being slightly larger and printed in grey.
Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-
sage texts on the information display (e.g.
Audio settings).
Labels The car contains different types of label which
are designed to convey important information
in a simple and clear manner. The labels in the
car have the following descending degree of
importance for the warning/information.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 6
evastarck
Introduction
Important information
7
Warning for personal injury
G031596
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field. Used
to indicate the presence of danger which, if the
warning is ignored, may result in serious per-
sonal injury or fatality.
Risk of property damage
G031597
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which,
if the warning is ignored, may result in damage
to property.
Information
G031600
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the owner's
manual.
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corres-
ponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters adja-
cent to the series of illustrations where the
order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum-
bered and are used to illustrate a move-
ment.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 7
evastarck
Introduction
Important information
8
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-
step instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different com-
ponents are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in con-
nection with the illustration that describes
the item.
Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
Coolant
Engine oil
To be continued This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when a section continues on the following
page.
Recording data
The driving and safety systems in the car use
computers which check and share information
with each other on the car's function. One or
more of these computers may store informa-
tion on the systems they check during normal
driving, during the course of a collision or near-
collision. Stored information may be used by:
Volvo Car Corporation
Service or repair workshops
Police or other authorities
Other parties who claim legal entitlement for access to the information or someone who has permission from the owner to access the information.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories can negatively affect the car's
electrical system. Certain accessories only
function when their associated software is
installed in the car's computer system. Always
contact an authorised Volvo workshop before
installing accessories which are connected to
or affect the electrical system.
Laser sensor
This vehicle is equipped with a sensor which
transmits laser light. It is absolutely essential to
follow the prescribed instructions when han-
dling the laser sensor.
The following two labels relate to the laser sen-
sor:
G 03
38 53
The upper label describes the laser light's classification, Invisible Laser radiation Do not view directly with optical instruments (magnifiers) Class 1M laser product.
This text is printed in the next warning box.
The lower label describes the laser light's physical data: IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 8
evastarck
Introduction
Important information
9
Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001.
The physical data is specified in the following
table and other text is printed in the next warn-
ing box.
Radiation data for the laser sensor
Maximum pulse energy 2.64 J
Maximum average output 45 mW
Pulse duration 33 ns
Divergence (horizontal verti-
cal)
28 12
WARNING
If any of these instructions are not followed then there is a risk of eye injury!
Testing, repair, removal, adjustment and/or replacement of the laser sen- sor's spare parts must only be carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop.
To avoid exposure to harmful radiation, do not carry out any readjustments or maintenance other than those specified here.
The repairer must follow specially drawn up workshop information for the laser sensor.
Do not remove the laser sensor (this includes removing the lenses). A removed laser sensor does not fulfil laser class 3B as per standard IEC 60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-safe and therefore entails a risk of injury.
The laser sensor's connector must be unplugged before removal from the windscreen.
The laser sensor must be fitted onto the windscreen before the sensor's con- nector is plugged in.
Never look into the laser sensor (which emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magnifying optics such as a magnifying
glass, microscope, lens or similar opti- cal instruments.
The laser sensor transmits laser light when the remote control key is in posi- tion II and also with the engine switched off (see page 70 on key positions).
For more information on the laser sensor, see
page 164.
Owner's manual on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-
mation concerning your car.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 9
evastarck
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
10 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
G 00
00 00
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-
ration's core values which influence all opera-
tions. We also believe that our customers share
our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufac-
tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-
efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-
ration has global ISO certification, which
includes the environmental standard ISO
14001 covering all factories and several of our
other units. We also set requirements for our
partners so that they work systematically with
environmental issues.
EPI (Environmental Product Information) is
supplied for all Volvo models. Here you can see
how the environment is affected during the
entire lifecycle of the car.
Read more at www.volvocars.com/EPI.
Fuel consumption Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption
in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel
consumption generally results in lower emis-
sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-
sumption. For more information read under the
heading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-
cept "Clean inside and out" a concept that
encompasses a clean interior environment as
well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well
below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger com-
partment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-
rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 10
evastarck
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
11
ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic
outside.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-
tored continuously and if there is an increase
in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone
and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon
filter.
Textile standard The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-
sant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials. This
means that they also fulfil the requirements in
the Oeko-Tex 100 standard1, a major advance
towards a healthier passenger compartment
environment.
Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car-
pets and fabrics for example. The leather in the
upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning
with plant substances and fulfils the certifica-
tion requirements.
Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption
for your car. In this way you contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and mainte-
nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-
tem. We make clear demands regarding the
way in which our workshops are designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. Our workshop staff have the
knowledge and the tools required to guarantee
good environmental care.
Reducing environmental impact You can easily help reduce environmental
impact, for example, by driving economically
and by servicing and maintaining the car
according to the instructions in the owner's
manual.
The following advice will help you to do your bit
for the environment: (for further advice on how
you can reduce environmental impact and
drive economically, see page 204).
Decrease fuel consumption by choosing ECO tyre pressure, see page 261.
A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher fuel consumption. Remove them directly after use.
Remove unnecessary items from the car. The greater the load the higher the fuel consumption.
If the car is equipped with an engine block heater, always use it before starting from cold. This reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions.
Drive gently and avoid braking too hard.
Drive in the highest gear possible. Low engine speeds result in lower fuel con- sumption.
Use engine braking to slow down.
Avoid letting the engine idle. Pay attention to local regulations. Switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods.
Always dispose of environmentally hazar- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environmentally safe manner. If uncer- tain about disposal, consult an authorised Volvo workshop for advice.
Service your car regularly.
High speed increases consumption con- siderably due to increased wind resis- tance. A doubling of speed increases wind resistance 4 times.
These hints will help reduce fuel consumption
without increasing travel time or lessening the
enjoyment of driving. Apart from being kind to
1 More information on www.oekotex.com
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 11
evastarck
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
12
your car, you'll be saving money - and the
Earth's resources.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 12
evastarck
Introduction
13
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 13
evastarck
G 02
08 71
14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seatbelts ................................................................................................ 16
Airbag system (SRS - Airbag)................................................................. 19
Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 22
Side airbags (SIPS bags) ....................................................................... 24
Inflatable Curtain (IC) .............................................................................. 26
WHIPS .................................................................................................... 27
Roll-Over Protection System - ROPS..................................................... 29
When the systems deploy ...................................................................... 30
Safety mode............................................................................................ 31
Child safety............................................................................................. 32
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 14
evastarck
01 SAFETY
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 15
evastarck
01 Safety
Seatbelts01
16
General information
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all
passengers use their seatbelts.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide maximum protection.
Do not lean the backrest too far back. The
seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal
seating position.
Putting on a seatbelt Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by
pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud "click"
indicates that the seatbelt has locked.
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear
seat.
Releasing the seatbelt Press the red lock button and then let the seat-
belt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully,
feed the seatbelt in by hand so that it does not
hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
Keep in mind the following
do not use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything
the hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen)
tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt as in the pre- ceding illustration.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per- son.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts your- self. Contact an authorised Volvo work- shop.
If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the protective characteristics of the seat- belt may have been lost, even if it appears to be undamaged. In addition, replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and intended for installation in the same position as the replaced seatbelt.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 16
evastarck
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
17
Seatbelts and pregnancy
G 02
09 98
The seatbelt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is then crucial that it be worn
in the correct way. The diagonal section should
wrap over the shoulder then be routed between
the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen.
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove all slack from the seatbelt and ensure
that it fits close to the body. In addition, check
that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means that they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). They should strive to posi-
tion the seat with as large a distance as possi-
ble between their abdomen and the steering
wheel.
Seatbelt reminder
G 01
77 26
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual
reminder. The audio reminder is speed
dependent, and in some cases time depend-
ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof
console and the combined instrument panel.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. The mes- sage is shown in the information display when the seatbelts are being used or when a rear door is opened. The message is automatically cleared after approx. 30 sec- onds or can be acknowledged manually by pressing the direction indicator lever's READ button.
Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- belts is unfastened during travel. This warning takes the form of a message on the information display along with the audio/visual signal. The warning stops when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can also be acknowledged manually by press- ing the READ button.
The message on the information display show-
ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail-
able. Press the READ button to see stored
messages.
Certain markets An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind
the driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one.
At low speed, the audio reminder will sound for
the first 6 seconds.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 17
evastarck
01 Safety
Seatbelts01
18
Seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten-
sioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner
tightens the seatbelt in the event of a suffi-
ciently violent collision. The seatbelt then pro-
vides more effective restraint for the occu-
pants.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 18
evastarck
01 Safety
Airbag system (SRS - Airbag) 01
19
Warning symbol on the combined instrument panel
o 0 1
G 02
10 10
The airbag system is continuously monitored
by the system's control module. The warning
symbol in the combined instrument panel illu-
minates when the remote control key is in posi-
tion II or III. The symbol goes out after approx.
6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault-
free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- ing, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indi- cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys- tem, SIPS, the IC system or another fault in the SRS system. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
As well as the warning symbol, a message may
appear on the information display in appropri-
ate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions,
the warning triangle illuminates and SRS
Airbag Service required or SRS Airbag
Service urgent appears in the display. Con-
tact an authorised Volvo workshop immedi-
ately.
Overview, airbag system
G 01
86 65
SRS system, left-hand drive.
G 01
86 66
SRS system, right-hand drive.
The SRS system consists of airbags and sen-
sors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the
sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 19
evastarck
01 Safety
Airbag system (SRS - Airbag)01
20
gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates
when compressed. When this occurs, smoke
escapes into the car. This is completely nor-
mal. The entire process, including inflation and
deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of
a second.
WARNING
Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Any interfer- ence in the airbag system could cause mal- function and result in serious personal injury.
NOTE
The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts on the driver and passen- ger side are used.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- sion. The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accord- ingly so that one or more airbags are deployed.
The capacity of the airbags is also adapted to the collision force to which the vehicle is subjected.
G 02
10 13
Location of the front passenger airbag in a left- hand drive car.
G 02
10 14
Location of the front passenger airbag in a right- hand drive car.
Airbag on the driver's side
G 02
10 11
The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System) on the driver's side to sup-
plement the protection afforded by the seat-
belt. This airbag is fitted into the centre of the
steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked
SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 20
evastarck
01 Safety
Airbag system (SRS - Airbag) 01
21
Passenger airbag
G 02
18 37
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-
tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-
ger side. This airbag is folded up into a
compartment above the glovebox. Its cover
panel is marked SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated 1.
Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front pas- senger seat if the airbag is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger the life of the child.
Airbag label
G 03
22 44
Label for airbag located on door pillar.
1 For information on how to activate/deactivate the airbag, see page 22.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 21
evastarck
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag*01
22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Key switch off - PACOS
General information The airbag for the front passenger seat can be
deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For
information on how to activate/deactivate, see
under the heading Activating/deactivating.
Key switch off/switch The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instru-
ment panel and is accessible when the pas-
senger door is open, (see under the following
heading, "Switch PACOS"). Check that the
switch is in the required position. Volvo rec-
ommends that the remote control key's key
blade be used to change position.
For information on the key blade, see
page 42.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger the life of passengers in the car.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag, but has no switch (PACOS, Passen- ger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbag is always activated.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the message in the roof panel (see page 23) indicates that the airbag is deactivated and if the warning symbol for the airbag system is also displayed in the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
Activating/deactivating
G 03
20 72
Switch location.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, persons taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 22
evastarck
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger life.
Messages
2
2
G 01
77 24
Indicator in the roof console showing that the pas- senger airbag is deactivated.
A text message and a symbol in the roof panel
indicate that the airbag for the front passenger
seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).
G 01
78 00
Indicator in the roof console showing that the pas- senger airbag is activated.
A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates
that the airbag for the front passenger seat is
activated (see preceding illustration).
NOTE
When the remote control key is turned to ignition position II or III, the airbag warning symbol is shown in the combined instru- ment panel for approx. 6 seconds, see page 19.
Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag. For more information on the remote control key's different ignition positions, see page 70.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 23
evastarck
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01
24
Side airbag
G 03
29 49
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-
lars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-
er's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and the hip and are an important
part of the SIPS.
The SIPS bag system consists of two main
components, side airbag and sensors. The
side airbags are located in the front seat backr-
ests.
WARNING
Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Any inter- ference in the SIPS bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.
Use only seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.
The side airbag is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Child seats and side airbags The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placed
on the front passenger seat provided that the
car does not have an activated1 passenger air-
bag.
Location
G 02
43 77
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
G 02
43 78
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips
1 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 22.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 24
evastarck
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01
25
the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.
The airbag inflates between the occupant and
the door panel and thereby cushions the initial
impact. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
Label
G 03
22 54
Label for side airbag located on door pillar.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 25
evastarck
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (IC) 01
26
Properties
G 03
20 25
The inflatable curtain (IC) is a supplement to the
SIPS and SRS airbags. It is fitted in the head-
lining along both sides of the roof and protects
the car occupants sitting in the outer seats. A
sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the inflatable curtain is inflated. The inflat-
able curtain helps to prevent the driver and
passengers from striking their heads on the
inside of the car during a collision.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended pro- tection. Only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under the top edge of the door windows. Other- wise, the intended protection of the inflat- able curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 26
evastarck
01 Safety
WHIPS 01
27
Protection against whiplash injury WHIPS
G 02
10 18
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-
sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-
cially designed head restraints in the front
seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the col-
lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
WARNING
Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to alter
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/cushions The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Correct seating position For the best possible protection, the driver and
front seat passenger should sit in the centre of
the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys- tem checked even after a minor rear-end collision.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 27
evastarck
The WHIPS-system is a complement to the
seatbelt. Always use a seatbelt.
01 Safety
WHIPS01
28
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
G 02
18 42
Objects behind driver's/passenger seat.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.
G 01
85 67
Objects in the rear seat.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 28
evastarck
01 Safety
Roll-Over Protection System - ROPS 01
29
Function
Volvo's Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)
has been designed to reduce the risk of the car
overturning and to provide the best possible
protection in the event of such an accident.
The system consists of a stabiliser system,
Roll Stability Control (RSC) that minimises the
risk of overturning, for example, during sudden
evasive manoeuvres or if the car skids.
The RSC system uses a sensor which registers
changes in the car's lateral inclination angle.
This information is used to calculate the risk of
the car overturning. If a risk exists, the DSTC
system engages, engine torque is lowered and
one or more wheels are braked until the car has
regained its stability.
Read more about the DSTC system on page
150.
WARNING
Under normal driving conditions, the RSC system improves the car's road safety, but this must not be taken as a reason to increase speed. Always follow the usual precautions for safe driving.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 29
evastarck
01 Safety
When the systems deploy 01
30
When the systems deploy
System Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner,
front seat
In the event of a
frontal collision,
and/or side-impact
collision, and/or
rear-end collision
and/or overturning
Seatbelt tensioner,
rear seat
In the event of a
frontal collision and/
or overturning
Airbags (SRS) In a frontal collisionA
Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact
accidentA
Inflatable Curtain IC In the event of a
side-impact colli-
sion and/or over-
turningA
Whiplash protection
WHIPS
In a rear-end colli-
sion
A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a col- lision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have deployed, the following is
recommended:
Have the car transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
Let an authorised Volvo workshop replace components in the car's safety system.
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys- tems are deployed only once during a colli- sion.
WARNING
The airbag control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, discon- nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Have the car transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 30
evastarck
01 Safety
Safety mode 01
31
Reduced functionality
G 02
10 62
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
Safety mode See manual may appear on the
information display. This means that the car
has reduced functionality. Safety mode is a
protective state that is enforced when the col-
lision may have damaged any of the car's vital
functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for
one of the safety systems, or the brake system.
Attempting to start the car First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
Firstly, remove the remote control key and then
reinsert it. The car's electronics will then try to
reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to
start the car. If the message Safety mode See
manual is still shown on the display then the
car must not be driven or towed, but a vehicle
recovery service used instead. Even if the car
appears to be driveable, hidden damage may
make the car impossible to control once mov-
ing.
Moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual has been reset, the car can be
moved carefully out of a dangerous position.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Always allow an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal sta- tus after Safety mode See manual has been displayed.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode message is displayed. Leave the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported to an author- ised Volvo workshop.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 31
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety01
32
Children should sit comfortably and safely
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size, for more information, see page 33.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child
to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo's own child safety equipment is
designed for your car. Use Volvo genuine
equipment to best ensure that the mounting
points and attachments are correctly posi-
tioned and are sufficiently strong.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
Child seats
G 02
07 39
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
Volvo has child safety products that are
designed for and tested by Volvo.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- tions included.
Do not attach the straps for the child seat to
the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or
beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam-
age the straps.
Allow the back of the child seat to rest against
the dashboard. This applies to cars without a
passenger airbag, or where the airbag is deac-
tivated.
Location of child seats
You may place:
a child seat/booster cushion on the pas- senger seat, provided the passenger air-
bag is not activated 1.
a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat that uses the passenger seat backrest as sup- port.
Always place a child in the rear seat if the pas-
senger airbag is activated. A child sitting on the
front passenger seat could suffer serious injury
if the airbag deploys.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger the life of the child.
1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 32
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety 01
33
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.
Airbag label
Label located on instrument panel end face on the passenger side.
Recommended child seats 2
Weight/Age Front seat Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
(0 9 months)
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt,
straps and support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
Britax Baby Safe Plus rear-facing child
seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture sys-
tem.
Type approval: E1 03301146
Britax Baby Safe Plus rear-facing
child seat, secured with the ISOFIX
fixture system.
Type approval: E1 03301146
Britax Baby Safe Plus rear-facing
child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 03301146
2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 33
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety01
34 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Weight/Age Front seat Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 1
9 18 kg
(9 36 months)
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt,
straps and support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat,
secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and
straps.
Type approval: E5 03171
Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat,
secured with the ISOFIX fixture sys-
tem and straps.
Type approval: E5 03171
Group 2/3
15 36 kg
(3 12 yr)
Volvo Booster cushion with or without
backrest.
Type approval: E5 03139
Volvo Booster cushion with or with-
out backrest.
Type approval: E5 03139
Volvo Booster cushion with or with-
out backrest.
Type approval: E5 03139
Volvo 2-stage Integrated booster
cushion available as a factory fitted
option.
Type approval: E5 04189
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 34
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety 01
35
Integrated two-stage booster cushions*
G 01
78 75
Correct position, the seatbelt is positioned above the shoulder.
G 01
77 19
Incorrect position, the head must not be posi- tioned above the head restraint and the seatbelt must not be below the shoulder.
The booster cushions are specially designed to
provide optimum comfort and safety. In com-
bination with the seatbelt they are approved for
children who weigh between 15 and 36 kg and
who are 95 to 140 cm in height.
Check before driving that:
the 2-stage integrated booster cushion is correctly set (see table below) and in locked position
the seatbelt is in contact with the child's body and is not slack or twisted
the seatbelt does not lie across the child's throat or below the shoulder (see preced- ing illustrations)
the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned low over the pelvis to provide optimal pro- tection.
Stage 1 Stage 2
Weigh
t
22 - 36 kg 15 25 kg
Lengt
h
115 - 140 cm 95 - 120 cm
For instructions on adjusting the booster cush-
ion's two levels, see pages 35 36.
Raising the two-stage booster cushion
Stage 1
G 01
76 96
Pull the handle forward and up in order to
release the booster cushion.
G 01
76 97
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 35
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety01
36
Press the booster cushion backwards to
lock.
Stage 2
G 01
77 83
Start from the lower stage. Press the but-
ton.
G 01
77 84
Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge
and press it back against the backrest to lock.
WARNING
Repair or replacement should only be per- formed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion. If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of protection. The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the booster cush- ion from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be reset by being fully folded into the seat cushion. Refer to the heading below, Low- ering the two-stage booster cushion.
Lowering the two-stage booster cushion Lowering can take place from both the upper
and lower stage to fully lowered position in the
cushion. However, it is not possible to adjust
the booster cushion from the upper stage to
the lower stage.
G 01
76 92
Pull the handle forwards to release the
cushion.
G 01
76 94
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 36
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety 01
37
Press down with your hand in the centre of
the cushion in order to lock it.
WARNING
If the instructions regarding the two-stage booster cushion are not followed then this could cause serious injury to a child in the event of an accident.
IMPORTANT
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g. toys) left behind in the space under the cushion before lowering.
NOTE
The booster cushion must be lowered first when lowering the backrest.
Child safety locks, rear doors
The controls for operating the rear door power
windows and the rear door opening handles
can be blocked from opening from the inside.
For more information, see page 55.
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
G 02
10 64
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated
by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre-
ceding illustration).
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
NOTE
The ISOFIX fixture system is an accessory for the passenger seat.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
Size classes Child seats are in different sizes cars are in
different sizes. This means that not all child
seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Consequently, a size classification has been
introduced for child seats using the ISOFIX fix-
ture system in order to assist users in choosing
the correct child seat (see the following table).
Size class
Description
A Full size, front-facing child
seat
B Reduced size (alt.1), front-
facing child seat
B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-
facing child seat
C Full size, rear-facing child
seat
D Reduced size, rear-facing
child seat
E Rear-facing infant seat
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 37
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety01
38
Size class
Description
F Transverse infant seat, left-
hand
G Transverse infant seat, right-
hand
WARNING
Never place a child in the passenger seat if the car is equipped with an activated airbag.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi- cation then the car model must be included on the child seat's vehicle list.
NOTE
Contact a Volvo dealer for Volvo recom- mendations on ISOFIX child seats.
Types of ISOFIX child seat
Type of child seat Weight (Age) Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max. 10 kg (0 9 months) F - -
G - -
Infant seat, rear-facing max. 10 kg (0 9 months) E OK OK
Infant seat, rear-facing max. 13 kg (0 12 months) E OK OK
D OK OK
C - OK
Child seat, rear-facing 9 18 kg (9 36 months) D OK OK
C OK OK
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 38
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety 01
39
Type of child seat Weight (Age) Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Front-facing child seat 9 18 kg (9 36 months) B OK A OKA
B1 OKA OKA
A OKA OKA
A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Upper mounting points for child seats G
01 76
76
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for certain front-facing child seats.
These mounting points are located on the rear
of the seat.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Volvo recommends that small children should
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age
as possible.
NOTE
For cars with folding head restraints on the outside seats the head restraints should be folded to facilitate the installation of this type of child seat.
NOTE
For cars equipped with a cargo area cover over the cargo area, this must be removed before a child seat can be fitted in the mounting points.
For detailed information on how the child seat
should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be routed under the rear head restraints before being tensioned at the mounting point.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 39
evastarck
40 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key/key blade................................................................ 42
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*...................................... 47
Keyless drive*.......................................................................................... 48
Locking/unlocking................................................................................... 50
Child safety locks.................................................................................... 55
Alarm*...................................................................................................... 56
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 40
evastarck
02 LOCKS AND ALARM
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 41
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
42 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
The car is supplied with two remote control
keys or two PCCs (Personal Car
Communicator). They are used to start the car
and for locking and unlocking.
More remote control keys can be ordered up
to six can be programmed and used for the
same car.
The PCC has increased functionality com-
pared with the remote control key. Only the
remote control key is referred to in the remain-
der of this chapter when describing functions
available in both the PCC and remote control
key.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Always remember to switch off the power supply to power windows and sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.
Detachable key blade A remote control key includes a detachable
metal key blade for mechanical locking/
unlocking of the driver's door and glovebox.
The key blade is also used to deactivate/acti-
vate PACOS*, see page 22.
For key blade functions, see page 46.
The key blades' unique code is available at
authorised Volvo workshops, who can order
new key blades.
Loss of a remote control key If you lose a remote control key then new ones
can be ordered at an authorised Volvo work-
shop. The remaining remote control keys must
then be taken to the workshop. The code of the
missing remote control key must be erased
from the system as a theft prevention measure.
The current number of keys registered to the
car can be checked under Car settings Car
Key memory Number of keys. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 116.
Key memory door mirrors and power
driver's seat* The settings are automatically linked to the
remote control key; see page 73 and see
page 91.
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings Car Key memory
Seat & mirror positions. For a description of
the menu system, see page 116.
For cars with Keyless drive function, see
page 48.
Indicator for locking/unlocking When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key, the direction indicators
confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly
performed:
Locking - one flash
Unlocking - two flashes.
After locking the indication is only given if all
locks are activated once the doors have been
closed.
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings Light settings Lock
confirmation light and Car settings Light
settings Unlock confirmation light.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 116.
Immobiliser Each remote control key has a unique code.
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key with the correct code.
The following error messages in the combined
instrument panel's information display are rela-
ted to the electronic immobiliser:
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 42
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
43
Message Specification
Key error Try again Error reading remote
control key during
start. Try to start the
car again.
Car key not found Applies only to the
PCC's Keyless drive
function. Errors
reading the PCC
during starting. Try
to start the car
again.
Immobiliser Try
start again
Remote control key
function error during
start. If the fault per-
sists; contact an
authorised Volvo
workshop.
For starting the car, see page 95.
Low battery in remote control key The batteries should be replaced if:
the information symbol illuminates and Replace car key battery is shown in the display
and/or
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within 20 metres from the car.
For changing the battery, see page 47.
Functions
G 02
10 78
Remote control key.
Locking
Unlocking
Approach light duration
Tailgate
Panic function
G 02
10 79
PCC* (Personal Car Communicator).
Information
Function buttons
Locking Locks the doors and tailgate
and then activates the alarm.
Unlocking Unlocks the doors and tail-
gate while the alarm is deactivated.
The function can be changed from unlocking
all doors simultaneously, to opening the driv-
er's door after one press of the button and,
after a further press of the button - within 10
seconds - opening the remaining doors.
The function is changed under Car settings
Lock settings Doors unlock. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 116.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 43
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
44 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Approach lighting Used to switch on the
car's lighting at a distance. For more informa-
tion, see page 82.
Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the alarm
for the tailgate only1. For more information, see
page 51.
Panic function Used to attract attention
in an emergency.
Press and hold the red button for at least 3
seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to
activate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off
automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
Global opening* One long press - at least 4 seconds - on button
or opens or closes all windows. Also
closes the sunroof if open.
The function can be used to quickly air the car
in hot weather for example.
WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed using the remote control key, check that no one is in danger of getting hands caught.
Range The remote control key has a range of up to
20 m from the car.
NOTE
The remote control key functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked using the key blade, see page 46.
Unique functions PCC*
G 02
10 80
Information button
Indicator lamps
Using the information button enables access to
certain information from the car via the indica-
tor lamps.
Using the information button
Press the information button .
All indicator lamps flash for approximately
7 seconds and the light travels around on
the PCC. This indicates that the informa-
tion from the car has been read.
If any of the other buttons are pressed dur-
ing this time then the reading is interrupted.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illuminates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC), contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Indicator lamps display information in accord-
ance with the following illustration:
1 On cars with power tailgate* the tailgate is opened if the button is kept depressed for more than 2 seconds.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 44
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
45
G 03
02 62
Green continuous light the car is locked.
Yellow continuous light the car is
unlocked.
Red light flashing alternately in the two
indicator lamps indicates, using the HBS
(Heart Beat Sensor) that someone may be
in the car. This indication is only displayed
if the alarm was triggered.
Red continuous light the alarm has been
triggered.
Range The PCC lock functions have a range of up to
20 m from the car.
The approach lighting, panic function and the
functions controlled by the information button
have a range of up to a maximum of 100 m from
the car.
NOTE
The information button functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions etc.
Out of PCC range If the PCC is too far away from the car for the
information to be read then the status the car
was last left in is shown, without the light trav-
elling around on the PCC.
If several PCCs are used for the car then it is
only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking
that shows correct status.
NOTE
If no indicator lamps illuminate when the information button is used then this can be because the last communication between the PCC and the car was disrupted by sur- rounding radio waves, buildings, topo- graphical conditions etc.
Heart Beat Sensor
The function operates using an HBS (Heart
Beat Sensor). HBS is a supplement to the car's
alarm system and can indicate at a distance
whether anybody is in the car. This indication
is only displayed if the alarm was triggered.
The HBS detects an individual's heartbeat that
is transmitted to the car's bodywork. For this
reason the function of the HBS can be distur-
bed in an environment subject to noise and
vibration.
Detachable key blade
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
the driver's door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key
access to the glovebox is blocked.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 45
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
46
Removing the key blade
G 02
10 82
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade straight
out backwards.
Inserting the key blade Carefully refit the key blade in place in the
remote control key, to avoid damaging it.
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is locked
in.
Unlocking doors with the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-
charged, then the driver's door can be opened
as follows:
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered.
1. Unlock the driver's door using the key
blade in the door handle's keyhole.
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 46
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 47
Replacing the battery Opening
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
side.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the
hole behind the spring-loaded catch and
gently prize the remote control key up.
NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat- teries falling out when it is opened.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the battery and its terminals with your fingers, as this could damage their functionality.
Battery replacement Closely study how the battery/batteries are
secured on the inside of the cover, with
regard to their (+) and () sides.
Remove control key (1 battery) 1. Carefully prize out the battery.
2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.
PCC* (2 batteries) 1. Carefully prize out the batteries.
2. First install one new one with the (+) side up.
3. Position the white plastic tab in between and finally install a second new battery with the (+) side down.
Battery type Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V
- one in the remote control key and two in the
PCC.
Assembly 1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is locked
in.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally-friendly way.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 47
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
02
48 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keyless drive (only PCC)
Keyless lock and ignition system
G 01
78 71
The keyless drive function in the PCC allows
the car to be unlocked, driven and locked with-
out the need for a key. You simply have to have
the PCC with you. The system makes it easier
and more convenient to open the car, for
example when your hands are full.
The car's two PCCs incorporate the Keyless
function. Additional PCCs can be ordered.
PCC range In order to open a door or the tailgate, a PCC
must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres from
the car door handle or tailgate. This means that
the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door
must have the PCC with him or her. It is not
possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is
on the opposite side of the car.
The red rings in the preceding illustration indi-
cate the range covered by the system's anten-
nas.
If all PCCs are removed from the car when the
engine is running or key position II is active
(see page 70) and if all doors are closed, then
a warning message is shown in the information
display and an audio reminder signal sounds at
the same time.
The warning message clears and the audio
reminder signal stops when the PCC is brought
back to the car after:
a door has been opened and closed
the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch
the READ button has been pressed.
Handling the PCC safely If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in the
car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car
is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.
However, if someone breaks into the car,
opens the door and finds the PCC, it can be
reactivated. It is therefore important to handle
all PCCs with great care.
IMPORTANT
Never leave a PCC behind in the car.
Interference to PCC function Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter-
fere with the keyless drive system. For this
reason, do not place the PCC near mobile
phones or metallic objects.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use
the PCC and key blade in the normal way, see
page 43.
Unlocking Open the doors with the door handles or open
the tailgate with the tailgate's handle.
Unlocking with the key blade If the keyless drive function in the PCC is not
operating, then the driver's door can be
unlocked with the key blade. In this case cen-
tral locking is not activated.
NOTE
Unlocking with the key blade triggers the alarm. For deactivation, see page 56.
Key memory driver's seat and door
mirrors
PCC memory function If several people each with a PCC approach the
car, then the settings for seat and mirrors are
implemented for the person who opens the
driver's door.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 48
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 49
After the driver's door has been opened by
person A with PCC-A, but person B with PCC-
B shall drive, the settings can be changed in
three ways:
Standing by the driver's door, or sitting behind the steering wheel, person B presses their PCC's unlock button, see page 43
Select one of three possible memories for seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see page 73.
Adjust the seat and mirrors manually; see page 72 and see page 90.
Locking Lock the doors and the tailgate by pressing the
lock button on one of the door handles on the
outside.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed
before the car can be locked. Otherwise the car
will not be locked.
NOTE
On cars with automatic transmission, the gear selector must be set in the P position otherwise the car cannot be locked or the alarm armed.
Lock settings The keyless function can be adapted to specify
which of the car doors are to be unlocked,
under Car settings Lock settings
Keyless entry. For a description of the menu
system, see page 116.
Antenna location
G 02
11 79
The keyless system has a number of integrated
antennae located around the car:
Tailgate, by wiper motor
Door handle, left rear
Roof, above centre rear seat
Cargo area, central and furthest in under
the floor
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system's antennae with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 49
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
50 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
From the outside
The remote control key can lock/unlock all
doors and the tailgate simultaneously. Different
sequences can be selected for locking/unlock-
ing; see page 116.
The lock buttons and door handles are disen-
gaged during locking which also prevents
opening from the inside, so-called deadlocks
function*, see page 53.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be dis-
charged - lock or unlock the door with the
detachable key blade; see page 46.
The fuel filler flap can be opened when the car
is unlocked, see page 206. It cannot be
opened if the car is locked and the alarm is
armed.
WARNING
Be aware that there is a risk that you can be locked in the car if it is locked from the out- side.
Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically. This function prevents the
car from being left unlocked unintentionally.
For cars with alarms, see page 56.
From the inside
G 01
92 16
All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked
or unlocked simultaneously using the central
locking button on either front door. Press one
side of the button to lock - the other side to
unlock.
Unlocking A door can be unlocked from the inside in two
different ways:
Press the central locking button (front doors only).
Press and hold to also open all side win-
dows*.
Pull the door handle once and release. Pull the door handle again to open the door.
Locking Press the central locking button after the front
doors have been closed. Press and hold to also
close all of the side windows and the sun-
roof*.
All the doors can be locked manually with their
respective lock buttons after the door has been
closed.
Automatic locking The doors and tailgate can be locked automat-
ically when the car starts to move.
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings Lock settings
Doors automatic lock. For a description of the
menu system, see page 116.
Glovebox
G 03
13 78
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 50
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 51
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked
using the remote control key's detachable key
blade. (For information on the key blade, see
page 42).
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked
position.
Pull out the key blade.
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
Tailgate
G 02
10 93
Unlocking with the remote control key The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed*,
and the tailgate unlocked and opened on its
own* by using the remote control key.
NOTE
On cars with the power operated tailgate option, the tailgate is opened otherwise it is only unlocked, see page 52.
If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm
indicator on the instrument panel stops to
show that alarm for the whole of the car is not
armed. The alarm's level and movement sen-
sors and the sensors for opening the tailgate
are automatically disconnected.
The doors remain locked and armed.
NOTE
When the tailgate is closed it remains unlocked until the car is relocked with the remote control key.
Unlocking the car from inside
G 02
10 99
To unlock and open* the tailgate.
Press the lighting panel button (1).
Locking with the remote control key Press the remote control key button for lock-
ing, see page 43.
If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm
indicator on the instrument panel starts to flash
to show that alarm is armed.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 51
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
52 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Power operated tailgate*
G 03
19 65
IMPORTANT
Pay attention to the height of the roof when using power operation. Do not use power tailgate operation with low roof heights, see under the heading "Interrupt opening/clos- ing the tailgate".
NOTE
If the system has been operating con- tinuously for more than 60 seconds then it is switched off to avoid overloading. It can be used again after about 10 minutes.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected then the cover must be opened and closed manually once in order to reset the system.
Snow and wind If the tailgate is forced down by something just
when it is being opened, e.g. snow, ice or
strong wind, and this causes the tailgate to
lower, then it is closed automatically.
Pinch protection If something with sufficient resistance prevents
the tailgate from opening/closing then the
pinch protection is activated.
During opening - power tailgate operation is deactivated and the tailgate is disen- gaged.
During closing - the tailgate returns to the fully open position.
WARNING
Pay attention to the risk of crushing when opening/closing. Before starting to open/ close; make sure that there is nobody close to the tailgate as a crushing injury could have serious consequences.
Always operate the tailgate with caution.
Manual tailgate operation The system is disengaged if the rubberised
pressure plate beneath the outside handle is
actuated a second time. The tailgate can then
be operated manually.
Opening the tailgate The tailgate can be opened three
ways (two of which involve this but-
ton):
Long press on the tailgate button in the lighting panel - hold the button depressed until the tailgate starts to open.
Long press on the tailgate button on the remote control key - hold the button depressed until the tailgate starts to open.
Lightly press the rubberised pressure plate beneath the outside handle and raise the tailgate.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 52
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53
Closing the tailgate Close using this button on the tailgate
or manually.
Press the tailgate's button the tailgate closes automatically.
Stop the opening/closing of the tailgate This can be done four ways (of which
three involve this button):
Press the tailgate button in the lighting panel
Press the tailgate button on the remote control
Press the tailgate button on the tailgate
Press the rubberised pressure plate beneath the outside handle.
Tailgate movement is stopped following the
same pattern as when pinch protection is trig-
gered. Refer to the section with the heading
"Pinch protection".
Deadlocks*
When deadlocked, the doors cannot be
opened from the inside if they are locked.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control key and are set after a 10 second delay
after the doors are locked.
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock
state with the remote control key. The driver's
door can also be unlocked with the detachable
key blade.
Temporary deactivation
G 03
13 84
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
Navigation
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off. This is carried out as follows:
1. Access the menu system under Car
settings (for a detailed description of the
menu system, see page 116).
2. Select Reduced guard.
3. Select Activate once: The instrument
panel display shows the message
Reduced guard - See manual and the
deadlocks function is switched off when
the car is locked.
or
Select Ask on exit: Each time the engine
is switched off the audio system's display
shows the message ENTER reduces
protection until the engine is started
again. Press EXIT to cancel - then select
one of the alternatives:
If the deadlocks function shall be switched off: Press ENTER and lock the car.
If the car is equipped with an alarm with move-
ment and tilt detectors*, then these are
switched off at the same time, see page 56.
The next time the engine is started, the system
is reset to zero and the instrument panel dis-
play shows the message Full guard at which
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 53
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
54
the deadlocks function and the alarm's move-
ment and tilt detectors* are re-engaged.
Or:
If the locking system shall not be changed: Make no selection and lock the car or press EXIT and lock the car.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with an alarm:
Remember that the car's alarm is armed when the car is locked.
If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm will be triggered.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 54
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 55
Manual blocking of the rear doors
G 02
10 77
The child safety locks are located on the trailing
edge of the rear doors and are only accessible
when the doors are open.
Use the key blade to turn the lock and thus
activate or deactivate the child safety lock.
The door cannot be opened from inside.
The doors can be opened from inside.
NOTE
Cars with electric child safety locks do not have manual child locks.
Electrical locking of the rear doors and power windows*
G 01
93 00
When the electric child safety lock is active:
the rear windows can only be opened with the driver's door control panel
the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside.
1. Child safety locks are activated/deacti-
vated in ignition position I or II see
page 70.
2. Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The information display shows a mes-
sage.
The lamp on the switch illuminates when
the locks are activated.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 55
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
The alarm is triggered if:
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened
a non-approved key is used or if an attempt is made to force the ignition switch
a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*)
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector*)
a battery cable is disconnected
anyone tries to disconnect the siren.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, the infor-
mation display shows a message. Contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
NOTE
The movement detectors trigger the alarm in the event of movements in the passenger compartment. For this reason the alarm could be triggered if the car is left with a window open or if an electric passenger compartment heater is used. To avoid this: Close the windows when leaving the car and aim the air from the passenger compart- ment heater so that it is not directed up into the passenger compartment.
NOTE
One of the detectors for the alarm is located under the cup holder in the centre console. This detector is sensitive for metals.
Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal objects in the centre console's cup holder as such objects could accidentally trigger the alarm.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components. All such attempts could affect the terms of insurance.
Alarm indicator
G 03
13 85
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
LED not lit Alarm not armed
The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm (and until the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch and key posi- tion I is selected) Alarm has been trig- gered.
Arming the alarm
Press the remote control key lock button.
Disarming the alarm
Press the remote control key unlock but- ton.
Deactivating a triggered alarm Press the remote control key unlock button or
insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
Other alarm functions
Automatic re-arming of the alarm This function prevents the car being left with
alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the
doors or the tailgate is opened within 2
minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-
armed. The car is relocked at the same time.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 56
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 57
Alarm signals When the alarm is triggered, the following hap-
pens:
A siren sounds for less than 30 seconds. The siren has its own battery which is inde- pendent of the car battery.
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm has been deactivated.
Remote control key not working If the remote control key is not working, the
alarm can still be switched off and the car
started as follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.
The alarm is triggered and the siren
sounds.
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch. The alarm is deactivated. The alarm
indicator flashes quickly until the remote
control key is inserted.
Reduced alarm level
G 03
13 84
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
Navigation
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
To avoid inadvertently triggering of the alarm -
for example when leaving a dog in the car or
during a ferry crossing - the movement and tilt
detectors can be temporarily switched off. This
is carried out as follows:
1. Access the menu system under Car
settings (for a detailed description of the
menu system, see page 116).
2. Select Reduced guard.
3. Select Activate once: The instrument
panel display shows the message
Reduced guard See manual and the
movement and tilt detectors are switched
off when the car is locked.
or
Select Ask on exit: Each time the engine
is switched off the audio system's display
shows the message Press ENTER to
reduce guard until engine is started.
Press EXIT to cancel - then select one of
the alternatives:
If the movement and tilt detectors shall be switched off: Press ENTER and lock the car.
If the car is equipped with the deadlocks func-
tion* then it is switched off at the same time,
see page 53.
The next time the engine is started, the system
is reset to zero and the instrument panel dis-
play shows the message Full guard at which
the movement and tilt detectors and the dead-
locks function are re-engaged.
Or:
If the detectors shall not be switched off: Make no selection and lock the car or press EXIT and lock the car.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 57
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Testing the alarm system
Testing the movement detector in the
passenger compartment 1. Close all windows. Remain in the car.
2. Arming the alarm, see page 56.
3. Wait 15 seconds.
4. Trigger the alarm by moving your arms for-
ward and back at backrest height. A siren
sounds and all direction indicators flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
Testing the alarm sensors in the doors 1. Arming the alarm, see page 56.
2. Wait 15 seconds.
3. Unlock the driver's door using the key
blade.
4. Open the driver's door. A siren sounds and
all direction indicators flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
Testing the alarm sensors in the bonnet 1. Sit in the car and deactivate the alarm, see
page 56.
2. Arm the alarm, see page 56. Remain in the
car and lock the doors with the button on
the remote control key.
3. Wait 15 seconds.
4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the
dashboard. A siren sounds and all direc-
tion indicators flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 58
evastarck
02 Locks and alarm
02
59
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 59
evastarck
G 02
09 12
60 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Instruments and controls........................................................................ 62
Key positions........................................................................................... 70
Seats....................................................................................................... 72
Steering wheel........................................................................................ 76
Lighting................................................................................................... 77
Wipers and washing................................................................................ 86
Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 89
Power panorama roof*............................................................................ 93
Starting the engine.................................................................................. 95
Starting the engine external battery..................................................... 97
Gearboxes............................................................................................... 98
All-wheel drive AWD*......................................................................... 102
Foot brake............................................................................................. 103
Hill Descent Control - HDC*.................................................................. 105
Parking brake........................................................................................ 107
HomeLink EU*..................................................................................... 110
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 60
evastarck
03 YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 61
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
62
Instrument overview
Left-hand drive.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 62
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63
Function Page
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam, trip
computer
77,
80, 118,
147
Cruise control 152, 153
Horn, airbags 20, 76
Combined instrument
panel
65, 69
Menu, audio and phone
control
116,
133, 192
Start/stop button 95
Ignition switch 70
Information display for
menu navigation
116
Door handle -
Control panel 50, 55,
89, 90
Hazard warning flashers 80
Menu control, climate
control and audio system
116,
123, 135
Function Page
Climate control, ECC* 123
Gear selector 98
Controls for active chas-
sis (Four-C)*
151
Wipers and washing 86, 87
Steering wheel adjust-
ment
76
Bonnet opener 226
Parking brake* 107
Seat adjustment* 72
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler flap
and tailgate
51, 77,
206
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 63
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
64
Right-hand drive.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 64
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65
Function Page
Information display for
menu navigation
116
Ignition switch 70
Start/stop button 95
Cruise control 152, 153
Combined instrument
panel
65, 69
Horn, airbags 20, 76
Menu, audio and phone
control
116,
123, 135
Wipers and washing 86, 87
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler flap
and tailgate
51, 77,
206
Door handle -
Control panel 50, 55,
89, 90
Seat adjustment* 72
Parking brake 107
Function Page
Bonnet opener 226
Steering wheel adjust-
ment
76
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam, trip
computer
77,
80, 118,
147
Controls for active chas-
sis (Four-C)*
151
Gear selector 98
Climate control, ECC* 123
Menu control, climate
control and audio system
116,
123, 135
Hazard warning flashers 80
Information displays
G 02
11 12
Information displays.
The information displays show information on
some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control,
trip computer and messages. The information
is shown with text and symbols.
There are further descriptions under the func-
tions that use the information displays.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 65
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
66
Meters
G 02
11 13
Meters in the combined instrument panel.
Speedometer
Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page
147, and Refuelling, page 206.
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Indicator, information and warning symbols
G 01
82 82
Indicator and warning symbols.
Indicator and information symbols
Indicator and warning symbols 1
Main beam and direction indicator symbol
Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in
key position II or when the engine is started.
When the engine has started, all the symbols
should go out except the parking brake sym-
bol, which only goes out when the brake is
disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the functionality
check is carried out in key position II then all
symbols go out after 5 seconds except the
symbol for faults in the car's emissions system
and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Indicator and information symbols
Symbol Specification
Direction indicators on trailer
Emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp on
Stability system
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Information, read display text
Main beam On
1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 227.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 66
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67
Symbol Specification
Left-hand direction indicators
Right-hand direction indicators
Direction indicators on trailer This symbol flashes when the direction indica-
tors are used and the trailer is connected. If the
symbol flashes more quickly then one of the
lamps on the car or the trailer is broken.
Emissions system If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to
a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to
an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-
tem checked.
ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the system is not
working. The car's regular brake system con-
tinues to work, but without the ABS function.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to
an authorised Volvo workshop to have the
ABS system checked.
Rear fog lamp This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp
is on. There is only one fog lamp. It is located
on the driver's side.
Stability system A flashing symbol indicates that the stability
system is operating. If the symbol illuminates
with constant glow then there is a fault in the
system.
Engine preheater (diesel)* This symbol illuminates during engine preheat-
ing. Preheating occurs when the temperature
is below 2 C. The car can be started once the
symbol goes out.
Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the level in the
fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
Information, read display text When one of the car's systems does not
behave as intended, this information symbol
illuminates and a text appears on the informa-
tion display. The message text is cleared with
the READ button, see page 119, or it disap-
pears automatically after a time (time depend-
ing on which function is indicated). The infor-
mation symbol can also illuminate in
conjunction with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the sym- bol and message are cleared using the READ button, or clear automatically after a while.
Main beam On The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
and with main beam flash
Left/right-hand direction indicators Both direction indicator symbols flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
Indicator and warning symbols
Symbol Specification
Low oil pressure A
Parking brake applied
Airbags SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 67
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
68
Symbol Specification
Fault in brake system
Warning
A For certain engine variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For informa- tion on checking the oil level, see page 227
Low oil pressure If this symbol illuminates during driving then
the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the
engine immediately and check the engine oil
level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi-
nates and the oil level is normal, contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
when the parking brake is applied. With the
electric parking brake, this symbol flashes
while it is being applied and then illuminates
with a constant glow.
A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen.
Read the message on the information display.
NOTE
This symbol also illuminates when the mechanical parking brake is only lightly applied.
Airbags SRS If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates
while driving, it means a fault has been
detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or
IC systems. Drive immediately to an authorised
Volvo workshop to have the system checked.
Seatbelt reminder This symbol illuminates if someone in a front
seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone
in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault
has occurred in the electrical system. Contact
an authorised Volvo workshop.
Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place
and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir,
see page 229.
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the
same time, there may be a fault in the brake
force distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.
If the symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 229. If the brake fluid level is nor- mal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great care, to an authorised Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the brake and ABS symbols are illumi- nated at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.
Warning The red warning symbol illuminates when a
fault has been indicated which could affect the
safety and/or driveability of the car. An explan-
atory text is shown on the information display
at the same time. The symbol remains visible
until the fault has been rectified but the text
message can be cleared with the READ but-
ton, see page 119. The warning symbol can
also illuminate in conjunction with other sym-
bols.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 68
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
further.
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accord-
ance with the message in the display. Clear
the message using the READ button.
Reminder doors not closed
If one of the doors, the bonnet 2 or tailgate is
not closed properly then the information or
warning symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory text message in the combined
instrument panel. Stop the car in a safe place
as soon as possible and close the door, bonnet
or boot lid, whichever is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower than
approx. 7 km/h then the information
symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than about 7 km/h then the warning
symbol illuminates.
Trip meter
G 02
11 23
Trip meter and controls.
Display for trip meter
Controls for switching between trip meters
T1 and T2, as well as resetting the trip
meters.
The meters are used to measure short dis-
tances.
One short press on the control switches
between the two trip meters T1 and T2. A long
press (more than 2 seconds) resets an active
trip meter to zero. The distance is shown in the
display.
Clock
G 02
11 25
Clock and setting knob.
Controls for setting the clock.
Information display for showing the time.
Turn the knob clockwise/anticlockwise to set
the time. The set time is shown in the informa-
tion display.
The clock can be temporarily replaced by a
symbol in conjunction with a message, see
page 119.
2 Only cars with alarm*.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 69
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
03
70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Functions
G 03
13 72
Ignition switch with remote control key, start/stop button.
Insert and remove the remote control key The remote control key is inserted into the igni-
tion switch. With one gentle push the remote
control key is captured into the correct posi-
tion.
The remote control key is withdrawn from the
ignition switch by means of one touch. The key
is then ejected and can be removed. Automatic
transmission* must be in position P.
For information on the audio system's func-
tions with remote control key removed, see
page 133.
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can impair the function or destroy the lock.
Do not insert the remote control key back- wards! Grip the end with the detachable key blade. see page 45.
NOTE
For cars with keyless function*, see page 48.
Key position 0 Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
Key position I Press the remote control key into the ignition
switch and press START/STOP ENGINE.
NOTE
To reach key position II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake/clutch pedal.
Key position II Press the remote control key into the ignition
switch and press START/STOP ENGINE for
approx. 2 seconds.
Starting the engine Start the engine, see page 95.
Stop engine Press START/STOP ENGINE.
If the car is moving or has automatic transmis-
sion and the gear selector is not in position P:
Press twice or hold the button depressed until
the engine stops.
Return to key position 0 Press START/STOP ENGINE to return from I
or II to key position 0.
WARNING
When towing, the remote control key must be in the ignition switch so that the lighting can be switched on.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 70
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
03
71
Posi- tion
Function
0 Odometer, clock and tempera-
ture gauge are illuminated. The
steering lock is deactivated. The
audio system can be used.
I The panorama roof, power win-
dows, phone, ventilation fan,
ECC and windscreen wipers can
be used.
II The headlamps come on. Warn-
ing/indicator lamps illuminate for
5 seconds. All equipment oper-
ates apart from heated seats and
rear window defroster which only
work when the engine is running.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 71
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Front seats
G 02
11 27
Lumbar support adjustment, turn the
wheel 1.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and ped-
als. Check that the seat is locked after
changing position.
Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Control panel for power seat*.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Check that the seat is locked in position.
Lowering the front seat backrest*
G 02
11 29
The passenger seat backrest can be folded
forward to make room for long loads.
Move the seat as far back/down as possi-
ble.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest
and fold it forward.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
Check that the front seat backrest is prop- erly engaged after it is raised.
Power seat*
G 02
11 33
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat forward/backward and up/down
Backrest rake
The power front seats have overload protection
which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an
object. If this happens, go to key position I or
0 and wait a short time before adjusting the
seat again.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
1 Also applies to power seat.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 72
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73
Preparations The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote con-
trol key without the key in the ignition switch.
Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi-
tion I and can always be made when the engine
is running.
Seat with memory function*
G 02
11 34
Store setting Memory button
Memory button
Memory button
Button for storing settings
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
2. Hold the button depressed to store set-
tings while depressing one of the memory
buttons.
Using a stored setting Hold one of the memory buttons depressed
until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you
release the button then the movement of the
seat will stop.
Key memory* in remote control key 2
The positions of the driver's seat and the door
mirrors are stored in the key memory when the
car is locked with the remote control key.
G 01
43 87
When the car is unlocked with the same remote
control key and the driver's door is opened the
driver's seat and also the door mirrors auto-
matically adopt the positions stored in the key
memory.
NOTE
The seat and the door mirrors do not move if they are already set the relevant position.
It is also possible to use the key memory by
pressing the unlock button on the remote con-
trol key when the driver's door is open.
The key memory can be activated/deactivated
under Car Key memory Seat & mirror
positions. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 116.
NOTE
The key memory in the two remote control keys and the seat's three memories are completely independent of each other.
Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the buttons to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
2 For key memory for keyless drive, see page 48.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 73
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
74
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Ensure that none of the backseat passengers will be trapped.
Rear seats
Head restraint, centre seat, rear G
00 00
00
Adjust the head restraint according to passen-
ger height so that the whole of the back of the
head is covered if possible. Slide it up as
required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button
(located in the centre between the backrest
and head restraint, see illustration) must be
pressed in while the head restraint is pressed
down.
Manual lowering of the outer head
restraints, rear seat
G 03
13 80
Pull the locking handle closest to the head
restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
The head restraint is moved back manually
until a "click" can be heard.
Lowering the rear seat backrest The triple-section rear seat backrest can be
folded in different ways in order to facilitate
loading long objects.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed for- wards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be folded forward fully.
The left-hand backrest can be folded sep- arately.
The centre backrest can be folded sepa- rately.
The right-hand backrest can be folded together with the centre backrest.
All backrests can be folded together.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 74
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
75
G 03
13 82
If the centre backrest is being lowered -
fold and adjust the centre backrest's head
restraint downwards, see page 74.
The outer head restraints are lowered auto-
matically when the outer backrests are
lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking
handle while folding the backrest for-
ward at the same time. A red indicator on
the lock catch shows that the backrest
is no longer locked in place.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seats are firmly locked after raising.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 75
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Steering wheel
03
76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Adjusting
G 02
11 38
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Possible steering wheel positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the
steering wheel lightly at the same time as
you push the lever back.
WARNING
Adjust and secure the steering wheel before driving.
With speed related power steering* the level of
steering force can be adjusted, see
page 151.
Keypads*
G 03
13 97
Keypads in the steering wheel.
Cruise control, see page 152
Adaptive cruise control, see page 153
Audio and phone control, see page 133
Horn
G 03
13 98
Horn.
Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 76
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77
Light switches
G 03
14 07
Overview, light switches.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting
Rear fog lamp
Front fog lamps*
Light switches
Thumbwheel 1 for headlamp levelling
Instrument lighting Different display and instrument lighting is
switched on depending on key position, see
page 70.
The display lighting is automatically subdued
in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the
thumbwheel.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical align-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-
zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting
the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the
car is heavily laden.
1. Allow the engine to run or have the remote
control key in position I.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/
lower beam alignment.
Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have auto-
matic headlamp levelling and are therefore not
equipped with the thumbwheel.
Main/dipped beam
G 03
14 05
Headlamp control and stalk switch.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
Posi- tion
Specification
Automatic*/deactivated dipped
beam. Only main beam flash.
Position/parking lamps
Automatic dipped beam. Main
beam and main beam flash
work in this position.
1 Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 77
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Main beam can only be activated in position
.
Main beam flash Move the stalk switch gently towards the steer-
ing wheel to the position for main beam flash.
Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is
released.
Dipped beam When the engine is started, dipped beam is
activated automatically* if the headlamp con-
trol is in position 2. If necessary, auto-
matic dipped beam for this position can be
deactivated by an authorised Volvo workshop.
In position dipped beam is always acti-
vated automatically when the engine is running
or when the remote control key is in position
II.
Main beam Main beam can only be activated when the
headlamp control is in position . Acti-
vate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk
switch towards the steering wheel to the end
position and release.
When main beam has been activated the sym-
bol illuminates in the combined instru-
ment panel.
Active Xenon lights*
G 02
11 43
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head-
lamps (ABL) then the light from the headlamps
follows steering wheel movement to provide
maximum illumination in bends and crossings,
so providing increased safety.
The function is activated automatically when
the car is started. The button in the cen-
tre console illuminates when the function is
activated, it flashes in the event of a malfunc-
tion. The function is only active in twilight or
darkness and only when the car is moving.
The function can be deactivated/activated with
the button.
For headlamp pattern adjustment, see
page 83.
Position/parking lamps
G 03
14 08
Headlamp control in position for position/parking lamps.
Turn the headlamp control to the centre posi-
tion (number plate lighting comes on at the
same time).
Rear position lamps also come on when the
tailgate is opened in order to alert anybody
behind.
2 For certain markets dipped beam is deactivated in this position.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 78
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79
Brake light
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking.
Emergency brake light and automatic
hazard warning flashers, EBL Emergency Brake Lights (EBL) are activated in
the event of heavy braking or if the ABS brakes
are activated. This function means that the
brake light flashes intensely to immediately
alert cars travelling behind.
The system is activated if ABS is used for more
than 0.5 seconds or in the event of heavy brak-
ing, however, only when braking from speeds
above 50 km/h. When the speed of the car is
lower than 30 km/h the brake lights shine nor-
mally again and the hazard warning flashers
are switched on automatically. The hazard
warning flashers remain on until the car accel-
erates again but can be deactivated with the
button for hazard warning flashers.
Front fog lamps*
G 03
14 09
Button for front fog lamps.
The front fog lamps can be switched on along
with main/dipped beam or position/parking
lamps.
Press the button for on/off. The light in the but-
ton illuminates when the fog lamps are on.
NOTE
Regulations for using front fog lamps vary between different countries.
Rear fog lamp
G 03
14 10
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp and
can only be switched on in combination with
main/dipped beam or the front fog lamps.
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp
indicator symbol on the combined
instrument panel and the light in the button illu-
minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
The rear fog lamps are switched off automati-
cally when the engine is switched off.
NOTE
Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary between different countries.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 79
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
80
Hazard warning flashers
G 03
14 14
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in
the combined instrument panel flash when the
hazard warning flashers are in use.
The hazard warning flashers are activated
automatically when the car brakes so suddenly
that the emergency brake lights (EBL) are acti-
vated and if the speed is below 30 km/h. They
remain on when the car has stopped and are
deactivated automatically when the car is
driven off again or if the button is depressed.
Direction indicators/flashers
G 03
14 15
Direction indicators/flashers.
Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction
indicators flash three times. The function
can be activated/deactivated under Car
settings Light settings Turn
indicators, 3-flash. For a description of
the menu system, see page 116.
Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the
outer position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Direction indicator symbols For direction indicator symbols, see page 67.
Interior lighting
G 02
11 49
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Interior lighting
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on and off manually within
30 minutes from when:
the engine has been switched off and the remote control key is in position 0
the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 80
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
81
Front roof lighting The front reading lamps are switched on or off
by pressing the relevant button in the roof con-
sole.
Rear roof lighting
G 03
14 16
Rear roof lighting in cars with panorama roof.
G 02
11 50
Rear roof lighting in cars without panorama roof.
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing
each respective button.
Courtesy lighting Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart-
ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-
tively when a side door is opened or closed.
Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror The lighting for the vanity mirror, see
page 191, is switched on and off respectively
when the cover is opened or closed.
Lighting, cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on
and off respectively when the tailgate is
opened or closed.
Automatic lighting The switch for passenger compartment light-
ing has three positions for the lighting in the
passenger compartment:
Off right-hand side depressed, automatic lighting deactivated.
Neutral position automatic lighting acti- vated.
On left-hand side depressed, passenger compartment lighting on.
Neutral position When the button is in neutral position the pas-
senger compartment lighting is switched on
and off automatically in accordance with the
following.
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade, see pages 43 or 45
the engine is switched off and the remote control key is in position 0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 81
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
the engine is started
the car is locked.
The passenger compartment lighting comes
on and remains on for two minutes if one of the
doors is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the
car is locked then it will be switched off auto-
matically after two minutes.
Home safe light duration
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the
steering wheel to the end position and
release it. The function can be activated in
the same way as with main beam flash, see
page 77.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number
plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy
lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the home safe
lighting should be kept on can be set under Car
settings Light settings Home safe light
duration. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 116.
Approach light duration*
Approach lighting is switched on with the
remote control key, see page 43, and is used
to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
When the function is activated with the remote
control, parking lamps, door mirror lamps,
number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and
courtesy lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the approach light-
ing should be kept on can be set under Car
settings Light settings Approach light
duration. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 116.
Adjusting headlamp pattern
G 02
11 51
Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.
G 02
11 52
Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to
avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be
set for right or left-hand traffic. The correct pat-
tern will also better illuminate the verge.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 82
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83
Active Xenon headlamps*
Hold the button in the centre console
depressed for at least 5 seconds. The car must
be stationary when the headlamp pattern is
adjusted. The message HEADLIGHTS SET
FOR RH TRAFFIC or HEADLIGHTS SET
FOR LH TRAFFIC is shown in the display.
Halogen headlamps The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps
is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.
The headlamp pattern may not be as good.
Masking the headlamps 1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand
drive cars or the C and D templates for
right-hand drive cars with a scale of 1:1,
see page 85:
A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right lens)
B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)
C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right lens)
D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)
2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive
waterproof material and cut it out.
3. Position the self-adhesive templates at the
right distance from the edge of the head-
lamp lens using the illustration, see
page 84, and the dimensions in the fol-
lowing list:
Templates A and D: horizontal line approx. 104 mm, vertical line approx. 20 mm
Templates B and C: horizontal line approx. 167 mm, vertical line approx. 14 mm
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 83
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
84
Aligning the templates
Upper row: masking left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: masking right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 84
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
85
Templates for halogen headlamps
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 85
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
03
86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Windscreen wipers 1
G 03
14 20
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
Rain sensor, on/off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
Single sweep Raise the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Intermittent wiping Set the number of sweeps per time
unit with the thumbwheel when inter-
mittent wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping The wipers sweep at normal speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter - ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in and that any snow or ice on the wind- screen (and rear window) is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.
Rain sensor* The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
screen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
thumbwheel.
When the rain sensor is activated a light in the
button the rain sensor symbol is shown
in the right-hand display in the combined
instrument panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or the remote control key in position
I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch
must be in position 0 or in the position for a
single sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button
. The windscreen wipers make one
sweep.
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make
an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi-
tivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An
extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
turned upward.)
Deactivating Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but-
ton or move the stalk switch down to
another wiper program.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the key is removed from the ignition
switch or five minutes after the ignition has
been switched off.
1 Replacing the wiper blades and filling washer fluid, see page 238.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 86
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Deac- tivate the rain sensor while the car is running or the remote control key is in position I or II. The symbol in the combined instrument panel and the lamp in the button go out.
Washing the headlamps and windows
G 03
14 20
G 03
14 21
Washing function.
Washing the windscreen Move the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several more
sweeps once the stalk switch has been
released. The headlamps are washed alter-
nately to prevent light intensity being reduced.
NOTE
One headlamp is washed at a time.
Heated washer nozzles* The washer nozzles are heated automatically
in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid
freezing solid.
High-pressure headlamp washing* High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are washed automatically at every
fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Wiper and washer, rear window
G 03
14 20
G 03
14 22
Rear window wiper intermittent wiping
Rear window wiper continuous speed
Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow
in the illustration above) to initiate rear window
washing and wiping.
Wiper reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window
wiping 2. The function stops when reverse gear
is disengaged.
If the rear window wiper is already on at con-
tinuous speed, no change is made.
2 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 87
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
03
88
NOTE
On cars with rain sensor, the rear window wiper is activated with reversing, if the sen- sor is activated and it is raining.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 88
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89
General
Laminated glass The windscreen and panorama roof
have laminated glass. It is reinforced
which provides better protection
against break-ins and improved
sound insulation in the passenger compart-
ment. Other glass surfaces*.
Water and dirt-repellent coating* Windows are treated with a coating
that improves the view in difficult
weather conditions. Maintenance, see
page 264.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. Use the defroster to remove ice from the mirrors. An ice scraper could scratch the mirror glass!
Power windows
G 03
14 23
Driver's door control panel.
Switch for electric child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons,
see page 55.
Rear window controls
Front window controls
WARNING
Check that none of the rear seat passengers is in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the windows from the driver's door.
WARNING
Make sure that children or other passengers are not in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the windows, in par- ticular when the remote control key is used.
WARNING
If there are children in the car, remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.
Operating
G 03
14 24
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 89
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
90
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel in the driver's door. Each control
panel in the other doors can only control its
own respective power window. The power win-
dows can only be controlled with one control
panel at a time.
In order that the power windows can be used
the remote control key must be in position I or
II. After the car has been running the power
windows can be operated for several minutes
even when the remote control key has been
removed, but not however after the door has
been opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the
window is opened if anything prevents its
movement. It is possible to override the pinch
protection when closing has been interrupted,
e.g. with ice, by continuously holding the but-
ton up until the window is closed. The pinch
protection is reactivated after a brief pause.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.
Operating without auto Move one of the controls up/down gently. The
power windows move up/down as long as the
control is held in position.
Operating with auto Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs auto-
matically to its end position.
Remote control and central locking
buttons All side windows can be opened/closed auto-
matically with the remote control key or the
central locking buttons:
Press and hold the lock button until the
windows start to open/close. To interrupt
opening/closing, press the lock button
again.
Resetting If the battery is disconnected then the function
for automatic opening must be reset so that it
can work correctly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button
to raise the window to its end position and
hold it there for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
WARNING
Resetting must be carried out to ensure that pinch protection works.
Door mirrors
G 03
14 25
Door mirror controls.
Adjusting 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light in the button illumi-
nates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
WARNING
The mirrors are the wide angle type for opti- mum surveillance. Objects may appear fur- ther away than they actually are.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 90
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91
Retractable power door mirrors* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces:
1. Press down the L and R buttons at the
same time.
2. Release them after approximately one sec-
ond. The mirrors automatically stop in the
fully retracted position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended posi-
tion.
Storing the position* The mirror positions are stored in the key mem-
ory when the car has been locked with the
remote control key. When the car is unlocked
with the same remote control key the mirrors
and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions
when the driver's door is opened.
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car Key memory Seat & mirror
positions. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 116.
Angling the door mirror when parking The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking
for example.
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position
after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing
the button labelled L or R respectively
Automatic retraction when locking When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control key the door mirrors are auto-
matically retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings Fold mirr. when
locking. For a description of the menu system,
see page 116.
Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset electrically
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending to work correctly:
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-
tons.
2. Fold them out again with the L and R but-
tons.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Home safe and approach lighting The light on the door mirrors illuminates when
approach lighting or home safe lighting is
selected, see page 82.
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
G 03
14 26
Use the defroster to quickly remove misting
and ice from the rear window and the door mir-
rors.
Press the button once to start simultaneous
rear window and door mirror defrosting. The
light in the button indicates that the function is
active. Defrosting is deactivated automatically
and its duration is controlled by the outside
temperature.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 91
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The rear window is demisted/defrosted auto-
matically if the car is started in an outside tem-
perature lower than +9 C.
Automatic defrosting can be selected under
Climate settings Auto. rear defroster.
Select between On or Off. For a description of
the menu system, see page 116.
Interior rearview mirror
G 03
14 27
Control for dimming
Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming with the dimming control when lights
from behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the
control towards the windscreen.
Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control is
not available in mirrors with automatic dim-
ming.
The compass* can only be specified for rear-
view mirrors with automatic dimming, see
page 149.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 92
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Power panorama roof*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93
General
The panorama roof is divided into two sections.
Only the front section can be opened - hori-
zontally or vertically at the rear edge (ventilation
position).
The panorama roof has a curtain made of per-
forated fabric and located under the glass roof
to provide extra protection from factors such
as strong sunlight.
The panorama roof and curtain are operated
with a control located in the roof. The control
is activated when the key is in position I or II,
see page 70.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects can be trapped by the panorama roof's moving parts.
Always operate the panorama roof with caution.
Do not allow children to play with the controls.
If leaving the car, always take the remote control key/PCC with you*, and so prevent the panorama roof from being operated.
Operating
G 03
14 28
Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
The panorama roof and curtain can be oper-
ated in key position I or II.
Automatic operation 1. To open the curtain all the way - press the
control rearward to the automatic opening
position and release.
2. To then open the panorama roof all the way
- press the control rearward again to the
automatic opening position and release.
Close the roof/curtain by repeating the preced-
ing procedure in reverse order - press the con-
trol forward to the automatic closing position
instead.
Rapid opening/closing The panorama roof and curtain can be opened/
closed simultaneously:
To open - press the control rearward to the automatic operation position twice and release.
To close - press the control forward to the automatic operation position twice and release.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 93
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Power panorama roof*
03
94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Manual operation 1. To open the curtain - press the control
rearward to the point of resistance for man-
ual opening. The curtain moves towards
maximum opening as long as the button is
depressed.
2. To angle the panorama roof - press the
control rearward again to the point of resis-
tance for manual opening
3. To open the panorama roof - press the
control rearward to the point of resistance
for manual opening a third time. The pan-
orama roof moves towards maximum
opening as long as the button is kept
depressed.
Close the roof/curtain by repeating the preced-
ing procedure in reverse order - press the con-
trol forward to the manual closing position
instead.
NOTE
For manual opening, the curtain must be fully open before the panorama roof can be opened. For the reverse procedure, the panorama roof must be fully closed before the curtain can be closed.
Ventilation position
1
2
G 03
14 29
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the rear edge of the con-
trol upward.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-
trol down.
When the ventilation position is selected the
front section is raised at its rear edge. If the
curtain is fully closed when ventilation position
is selected - then it opens automatically
approx. 50 mm.
Closing using the remote control key or
central locking button
One long press on the lock button, see pages
43 (remote control key) and 50 (central locking
button), closes the panorama roof and all the
windows. The door mirrors are retracted* and
the doors and tailgate are locked. To interrupt
closing, press the lock button again.
WARNING
If closing the panorama roof with the remote control key, make sure nothing could become trapped.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 94
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
03
95
Petrol and diesel engines
G 03
13 72
Ignition switch with remote control key, start and stop button (for more information, see page 70).
IMPORTANT
Do not insert the remote control key back- wards!
Grip the end with the detachable key blade, see page 46.
1. For cars with remote control key, insert the
remote control key into the ignition switch.
Gently push in the key until it is pulled in.
2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1.
Depress the brake pedal in cars with auto-
matic gearbox.
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
and then release it.
The starter motor works until the engine has
started, but for no longer than 10 seconds (die-
sel up to 60 seconds).
If the engine has not started after 10 seconds,
try again by holding in the START/STOP
ENGINE button until the engine starts.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car, especially if there are children in the car.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock could be activated which would mean that the car cannot be steered.
Never remove the remote control key with the Keyless drive* function from the car while driving or during towing.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is so that the emissions system can reach normal operating tem- perature as quickly as possible, which min- imises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.
Keyless drive Follow steps 23 for starting petrol and diesel
engines.
1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 95
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
03
96
NOTE
In order for the engine to start, one of the car's remote control keys with Keyless drive* function must be located in the pas- senger compartment or the cargo area.
Steering lock The steering lock is deactivated when the
remote control key is inserted into the ignition
switch2 and activated when the remote control
key is removed from the ignition switch.
Activate the steering lock when leaving the car
to reduce the risk of car theft.
2 On cars with Keyless drive* the steering lock is deactivated when the start button is pressed in for the first time. The steering lock is activated when the engine is switched off and the driver's door is opened.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 96
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine external battery
03
97
Jump starting
G 02
13 47
If the battery is flat then the car can be started
with current from another battery.
The following points are recommended when
using a donor battery in order to avoid the risk
of an explosion:
1. Set the remote control key into position 0,
see page 70.
2. Ensure that the donor battery is 12 volt.
3. If the donor battery is in another car, switch
off the donor car's engine in the other car
and ensure that the cars do not touch one
another.
4. Connect the red jump lead to the positive
terminal on the donor battery .
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the
battery in your car and remove the cover,
see page 241.
6. Connect the red jump lead to the positive
terminal on the battery in your car,
located under a folding plastic cover.
7. Connect one clamp from the black jump
lead to the donor battery's negative termi-
nal .
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.
8. Connect the other clamp to an earthing
point, (right-hand engine mounting at the
top, the outer screw head) . Check that
the jump lead clamps are fixed securely so
that there are no sparks during the starting
procedure.
9. Start the engine of the "donor car". Let the
engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle (1500 rpm).
10. Start the engine of the car with the flat bat-
tery. Do not touch the crocodile clips dur-
ing the start procedure. There is a risk of
sparks forming.
11. Remove the jump leads, first the black and
then the red. Make sure that none of the
clamps on the black jump lead comes into
contact with the battery's positive terminal
or the clamp connected to the red jump
lead.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect a jump lead incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode. The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical attention immediately.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 97
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
98
Manual - six-speed
G 03
19 61
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.
Follow the shifting pattern indicated.
For the best possible fuel economy, use the
highest gear possible as often as possible.
Reverse gear inhibitor - six-speed
G 03
19 62
The reverse gear inhibitor prevents the possi-
bility of mistakenly attempting to engage
reverse gear during normal forward travel.
Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-
tionary.
Automatic gearbox, Geartronic
G 03
19 63
The information display shows the position of
the gear selector using the following indica-
tions: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, see
page 65.
Gear positions
Parking position (P) Select P when starting the engine or when the
car is parked. The brake pedal must be
depressed to disengage the gear selector from
the P position.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the
P position is engaged. Activate the electric
parking brake by pressing the button, see
page 107.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 98
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
99
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position P is selected.
Reverse (R) The car must be stationary when position R is
selected.
Neutral position (N) No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
stationary with the gear selector in position N.
Drive (D) D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
down takes place automatically based on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must
be stationary when the gear selector is moved
to position D from position R.
Geartronic manual gear positions (M) The driver can also change gear manually
using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The
car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal
is released.
Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving
the lever from D position to the end position at
M. The information display shifts the indication
from D to one of the figures "1-6", depending
on which gear is engaged just then, see
page 65.
Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to
change up a gear and release the lever, which
returns to its rest position at M.
Pull the lever back towards (minus) to change
down a gear and release the lever.
The manual gearshift mode M can be selected
at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
driver allows the speed to decrease lower than
a level suitable for the selected gear, in order
to avoid jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode move the
lever to the end position at D.
NOTE
If the gearbox has a Sport programme then the gearbox will only become manual after the lever has been moved forwards or back- wards in its M position. The information dis- play then shifts the indication from S to show which of the gears 16 is engaged.
Geartronic - Sport mode (S) 1
The Sport programme provides sportier cha-
racteristics and allows higher engine speed for
the gears. At the same time it responds more
quickly to acceleration. During active driving,
the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to
a delayed upshift.
Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever
from D position to the end position at M. The
information display shifts the indication from
D to S.
Sport mode can be selected at any time while
driving.
Geartronic - Winter mode It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads
if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear lever from the D position to the end position at M - the instrument panel display shifts the indication from D to the figure 1.
2. Change up to gear 3 by pushing the lever forward towards + (plus) twice - the display shifts the indication from 1 to 3.
3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car
moves off with a lower engine speed and
reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
1 Only on the T6 model.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 99
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
100
Kick-down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kick-
down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-
down position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-
tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox
control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func-
tion.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick-
down which would result in an engine speed
high enough to damage the engine. Nothing
happens if the driver still tries to shift down in
this way at high engine speed the original
gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depending
on engine speed. The car changes up when the
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
prevent damage to the engine.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
G 02
13 51
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions
are locked with a latch that is released with the
inhibitor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever
can be moved forwards or backwards between
P, R, N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gearbox has special safety sys-
tems:
Keylock To remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch, the gear selector must be in the
P position. The remote control key is locked in
all other positions.
Parking position (P) Stationary car with engine running:
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov-
ing the gear selector to another position.
Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking
position (P) To be able to move the gear selector from P to
other gear positions, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the remote control key must be
in position II, see page 70.
Shiftlock Neutral (N) If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from N to
other gear positions, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the remote control key must be
in position II, see page 70.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 100
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
101
Deactivating the automatic gear selector
inhibitor
G 03
13 90
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
battery, the gear selector must be moved from
the P position so that the car can be moved.
Lift away the rubber mat on the floor
behind the centre console and open the
hatch.
Fully insert the key blade. Press the key
blade down and hold (For information on
the key blade, see page 46.)
Move the gear selector from the P position.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 101
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
All-wheel drive AWD*
03
102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
All Wheel Drive is always engaged
All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving all
four wheels at the same time.
The power is automatically distributed
between the front and rear wheels. An elec-
tronically controlled clutch system distributes
the power to the wheels that have the best grip
on the current road surface. This provides the
best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under
normal driving conditions, the majority of
power is transmitted to the front wheels.
All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain,
snow and icy conditions.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 102
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
03
103
General
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If
one brake circuit is damaged then this will
mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level
and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to
produce the normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted
by a brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine is running.
If the brake is used when the engine is switched
off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force
must be used to brake the car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
load the brakes can be relieved by using engine
braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used
if the same gear is used downhill as up.
For more general information on heavy loads
on the car, see page 271.
Anti-lock braking system The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock
Braking System) which prevents the wheels
from locking during braking. This means the
ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to
swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration
may be felt in the brake pedal when this is
engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made auto-
matically after the engine has been started
when the driver releases the brake pedal. A
further automatic test of the ABS system may
be made when the car reaches 40 km/h. The
test may be experienced as pulses in the brake
pedal.
Cleaning the brake discs Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. This delay
is minimised by cleaning the brake linings.
Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road
surfaces, prior to long-stay parking and after
the car has been washed. Carry this out by
braking gently during a short period while en
route.
Emergency Brake Assistance Emergency Brake Assistance EBA (Emergency
Brake Assistance) helps to increase brake
force and so reduce braking distance. The EBA
system detects the driver's braking style and
increases brake force as necessary. The brake
force can be reinforced up to the level when the
ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is
interrupted when the pressure on the brake
pedal is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
Symbol Specification
Constant glow Check the
brake fluid level. If the level is
low, fill with brake fluid and
check for the cause of the brake
fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds
when the engine is started
There was a fault in the brake
system's ABS function when
the engine was last running.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 103
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
03
104
WARNING
If and illuminate at the same time then a fault may have arisen in the brake system.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor- mal at this stage, drive carefully to the near- est authorised Volvo workshop and have the brake system checked.
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 104
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Hill Descent Control - HDC*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105
General
HDC can be compared to an automatic engine
brake. When you release the accelerator on
downhill gradients the car is normally braked
by means of the engine striving for low engine
idling speeds, so-called engine braking. But
the steeper the road and the more load there is
in the car, the faster the car rolls despite engine
braking. In order to then reduce speed the
driver has to assist using the footbrake.
The HDC function makes it possible to
increase/reduce speed on steep downhill gra-
dients, with a foot only on the accelerator
pedal, without using the footbrake. The force
on the accelerator pedal is adapted. The brake
system brakes itself and automatically pro-
vides a low and even speed, so allowing the
driver to fully focus on steering.
HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients
with an uneven road surface and slippery sec-
tions. E.g. when launching a boat on a trailer
from a ramp.
WARNING
HDC does not work in all situations, but is instead only intended to be supplementary assistance.
The driver always has ultimate responsibility that the car is driven safely.
Function
G 03
19 64
HDC is engaged or disengaged using a switch
on the centre console. An indicator lamp in the
button illuminates when the function is
switched on. When HDC is operating the
symbol illuminates and the display
shows Hill descent control ON.
The function only operates in first gear position
and in reverse gear. For an automatic gearbox,
gear position 1 must be selected, which is
shown with the figure 1 in the trip computer
display, see page 98.
NOTE
HDC cannot be activated in an automatic gearbox with the gear selector in position D.
Operation
HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of
10 km/h forwards with engine braking and
7 km/h backwards. However, any speed within
the gear's speed register can be selected using
the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator
pedal is released, the car is braked quickly to
10 or 7 km/h respectively, irrespective of the
hill's gradient and without the need for the foot-
brake.
The brake lights come on automatically when
the function is operating. The driver can brake
or stop the car at any time by using the foot-
brake.
HDC is deactivated:
with the on/off button on the centre con- sole
if a gear higher than 1 is selected on a manual gearbox
if a gear higher than 1 is selected on an automatic gearbox, or if the gear selector is moved to position D.
The function can be disengaged at any time. If
it takes place on a steep downhill gradient then
the braking effect will not release directly, but
slowly instead.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 105
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Hill Descent Control - HDC*
03
106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
When HDC is activated, engine response during acceleration seems slower than nor- mal.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 106
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
03
107
Parking brake, electric
An electric parking brake has the same appli-
cations as a manual parking brake, e.g. when
starting uphill.
Function A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the parking brake is being applied. The noise
can also be heard during the automatic func-
tion checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake
is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels.
If it is applied when the car is moving then the
normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts
on all four wheels. Brake function changes over
to the rear wheels when the car is almost sta-
tionary.
Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low then the parking
brake can neither be released nor applied.
Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage
is too low, see page 97.
How to apply the parking brake
G 02
13 54
Parking brake control
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Press the control.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selector in position P (for automatic gearbox).
The symbol in the combined instrument
panel flashes until the parking brake is fully
applied. When the symbol illuminates the park-
ing brake is applied.
In an emergency the parking brake can be
applied when the vehicle is moving by depress-
ing the control. When the control is released or
the accelerator pedal is depressed the braking
is interrupted.
NOTE
In the event of emergency braking at speeds above 10 km/h a signal sounds during the braking procedure.
Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels
away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill, turn the
wheels towards the kerb.
How to release the parking brake
G 02
13 59
Parking brake control
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 107
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
03
108
Cars with manual gearbox
Releasing manually 1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
3. Pull the control.
NOTE
The parking brake can also be released manually by depressing the clutch pedal instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recom- mends the use of the brake pedal.
Releasing automatically 1. Start the engine.
2. Ease up the clutch and depress the accel-
erator.
IMPORTANT
It is possible to release the parking brake automatically, even when the gear lever is in neutral position, if the engine is running.
Cars with automatic gearbox
Releasing manually 1. Put the seatbelt on.
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
3. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
4. Pull the control.
Releasing automatically 1. Put the seatbelt on.
2. Start the engine.
3. Move the gear selector to position D or R
and depress the accelerator.
NOTE
For safety reasons, the parking brake is only released automatically if the engine is run- ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The parking brake is released immediately on cars with automatic gearbox when the accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear selector is in position D or R.
Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
car to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline.
Avoid this by depressing the control while driv-
ing off. Release the control when the engine
achieves traction.
Cars with Keyless drive function Release manually by pressing the START/
STOP ENGINE button, then depress the brake
or clutch pedal and pull the control.
Symbols
Symbol Specification
Read the message on the infor-
mation display
A flashing symbol indicates that
the parking brake is applied. If
the symbol flashes in any other
situation then this means that a
fault has arisen. Read the mes-
sage on the information display.
Messages
G 01
61 66
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 108
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
03
109
Park brake not fully released - A fault is pre-
venting the parking brake from being released.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop. A
warning signal sounds if you pull away with this
error message.
Parking brake not applied - A fault is pre-
venting the parking brake from being applied.
Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo work-
shop if the message remains.
The message is also illuminated on cars with
manual gearbox when the car is driven at low
speed with the door open in order to alert the
driver that the parking brake may have been
unintentionally disengaged.
Parking brake Service required - A fault has
arisen. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault
remains.
If the car has to be parked before the fault has
been rectified then the wheels must be turned
as if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged
(manual gearbox) or the gear selector must be
in position P (automatic gearbox).
Replacing the brake linings The rear brake linings must be replaced by an
authorised Volvo workshop due to the design
of the electric parking brake.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 109
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink EU*
03
110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
G 02
94 71
HomeLink is a programmable remote control
which can control up to three different devices
(e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light-
ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so
replace their remote controls. HomeLink is
supplied built into the left-hand sun visor.
HomeLink's panel consists of three program-
mable buttons and one indicator lamp.
NOTE
HomeLink is designed to be inoperable if the car is locked from the outside.
Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. for purchasing a new car).
Erase the programming for the buttons when selling the car.
Metallic sun visors should not be used in cars equipped with HomeLink. This could have a negative effect on the HomeLink function.
Operation When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be
used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Press the programmed button to activate the
garage door, alarm system etc. The indicator
lamp illuminates for the time that the button is
kept depressed.
NOTE
In the event that the ignition is not activated, HomeLink operates for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened.
The original remote controls can of course be
used in parallel with HomeLink.
WARNING
If HomeLink is used to operate a garage door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is in motion.
Do not use the HomeLink remote control for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse. The garage door must react immediately when it detects that something is preventing its movement, and stop directly and reverse. A garage door without these characteristics could cause personal injury. For further information - contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
Programming for the first time The first step erases the memory in HomeLink
and must not be carried out when only one
individual button is being reprogrammed.
1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not
release until the indicator lamp starts to
flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash-
ing indicates that HomeLink is set in "learn
mode" and is ready to be programmed.
2. Position the original remote control
5-30 cm from HomeLink. Monitor the indi-
cator lamp.
The particular distance that is required
between the original remote control and
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 110
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink EU*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111
HomeLink depends on the programming of
the device in question. Perhaps several
attempts will be required at different dis-
tances. Maintain each position for approx.
15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button for the original remote
control and the button to be programmed
on HomeLink simultaneously. Do not
release the buttons until the indicator lamp
has changed over from slow to rapid flash-
ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful
programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the
programmed button on HomeLink and
watching the indicator lamp:
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim-
ilar is not activated when the pro- grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.
5. Locate the "programming button 1" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-
culty in finding the button - consult the
supplier manual or contact the supplier via
the Internet: www.homelink.com.
6. Depress and release the "programming
button". The button flashes for approx. 30
seconds and the next step must be carried
out within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button on
HomeLink, while the "programming but-
ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for
approx. 3 seconds and then release.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
up to 3 times to conclude the program-
ming.
Programming individual buttons To reprogram an individual button, proceed in
accordance with the following:
1. Depress the required button on HomeLink
and do not release until step 3 has been
completed.
2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink
starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,
position the original remote control
5-30 cm from HomeLink. Monitor the indi-
cator lamp.
The particular distance that is required
between the original remote control and
HomeLink depends on the programming of
the device in question. Perhaps several
attempts will be required at different dis-
tances. Maintain each position for approx.
15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button on the original remote
control. The indicator lamp will start to
flash. When the flashing has changed over
from a slow to a rapid flashing - release
both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates
successful programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the
programmed button on HomeLink and
watching the indicator lamp:
1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 111
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink EU*
03
112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro- grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.
5. Locate the "programming button 2" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-
culty in finding the button - consult the
supplier manual or contact the supplier via
the Internet: www.homelink.com.
6. Depress and release the "programming
button". The button flashes for approx. 30
seconds and the next step must be carried
out within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button on
HomeLink, while the "programming but-
ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for
approx. 3 seconds and then release.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
up to 3 times to conclude the program-
ming.
Erasing programming It is only possible to erase the programming for
all the buttons on HomeLink, not for individual
buttons.
Depress the two outer buttons and do not
release until the indicator lamp starts to
flash after approx. 20 seconds.
> HomeLink is now set in so-called "learn
mode" and is ready to be programmed
once more, see page 110.
2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 112
evastarck
03 Your driving environment
03
113
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 113
evastarck
G 02
09 08
114 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Menus and messages........................................................................... 116
Climate control...................................................................................... 121
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*................................................... 129
Fuel-driven additional heater*............................................................... 132
Audio system........................................................................................ 133
Trip computer........................................................................................ 147
Compass*.............................................................................................. 149
DSTC Stability and traction control system....................................... 150
Adapting driving characteristics........................................................... 151
Cruise control*...................................................................................... 152
Adaptive cruise control*........................................................................ 153
Distance Alert........................................................................................ 159
City Safety......................................................................................... 162
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*...................................................... 167
Driver Alert System DAC*................................................................... 173
Driver Alert System - LDW*................................................................... 176
Park assist syst*.................................................................................... 179
Parking camera*.................................................................................... 182
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System................................................ 185
Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................ 189
Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................ 192
Built-in phone*...................................................................................... 197
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 114
evastarck
04 COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 115
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Centre console
Some functions are controlled from the centre
console via the menu system or via the keypad
in the steering wheel. Each function is descri-
bed under its respective section.
The current menu level is shown at the top right
of the centre console's display.
Centre console controls
Centre console with controls for menu navigation.
Navigation button scrolls and selects
among menu options
MENU leads to the menu system
EXIT leads back one step in the menu
structure. A long press leads out from the
menu system.
ENTER selects menu options
Numerical keypad 19
Steering wheel keypad*
ENTER
EXIT
Navigation buttons up/down.
If the steering wheel keypad has ENTER and
EXIT then these buttons, and the navigation
buttons, have the same functions as the con-
trols in the centre console.
Search paths Access to some functions is provided directly
via the function buttons and some are reached
via the menu system.
The search paths to the menu system's func-
tions are stated in the form: Car settings
Lock settings, which presupposes that fol-
lowing is carried out before:
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to the required menu, e.g. Car
settings, using the navigation buttons and
press ENTER.
3. Scroll to the required submenu, e.g. Lock
settings, and press ENTER.
The navigation buttons can be used instead of
ENTER and EXIT when navigating in the menu
hierarchy. The right-hand arrow is equal to
ENTER and the left-hand arrow to EXIT.
The menu options are numbered and can also
be selected directly with the numerical keypad
(only 19).
Menu overview The phone and audio sources each have sep-
arate main menus. An audio source main menu
(e.g. CD) can only be accessed when that par-
ticular audio source is active, see page 135.
The following menu options are included in
Main menu:
Car Key memory
Seat & mirror positions*
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 116
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117
Car settings
Fold mirr. when locking*
Collision warning settings*
Information
Light settings
Lock settings
Reduced guard1
Parking camera settings*
Steering force level*
Tyre pressure
Unit settings
Climate settings
Automatic blower adjust
Auto. rear defroster
Recirculation timer
Reset climate settings
Main menu AM
Audio settings
Sound stage
Equalizer front
Equalizer rear
Auto. volume control
Reset all audio settings
Main menu FM
FM settings
News
TP (Traffic information)
Radio text
PTY (Program type)
Advanced radio settings
Audio settings2
Main menu DAB*3
Main menu CD
Random
Off
Folder4
Disc4
Single disc5
All discs5
CD settings
Disc text*
News
TP (Traffic information)
Audio settings2
Main menu AUX
AUX input volume
Audio settings2
Main menu USB
USB settings
News
TP (Traffic information)
Audio settings2
Main menu iPod
iPod settings
News
TP (Traffic information)
Audio settings2
1 Available in certain models. 2 For submenus, see "Main menu AM/Audio settings". 3 See page 143. 4 Only in systems that allow the playback of MP3 and WMA format audio files. 5 Only in systems with CD changer.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 117
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Main menu, Bluetooth
Last 10 missed calls
Last 10 received calls
Last 10 dialled calls
Phone book
Search
Copy fr. mobile phone
Bluetooth*
Connect phone
Change phone
Remove phone
Phone settings
Call options
Sounds and volume
Synchronise phone book
Main menu, built-in phone
Call register
Last 10 missed calls
Last 10 received calls
Last 10 dialled calls
Erase list
Call duration
Phone book
New contact
Search
Copy all
Erase SIM
Erase phone
Memory status
Messages
Read
Write new
Message settings
Call options
Send my number
Call waiting
Automatic answer
Voice mail number
Diversions
Phone settings
Network selection
SIM security
Edit PIN code
Sounds and volume
IDIS
Reset Phone settings
Combined instrument panel
G 02
13 64
Information display and controls for menus.
READ access to message list and mes-
sage confirmation.
Thumbwheel browse between menu
options.
RESET reset the active function. Used in
certain cases to select/activate a function,
see the explanation under each respective
function.
The menus shown on the information displays
in the combined instrument panel are con-
trolled with the left-hand stalk switch. The
menus shown depend on key position, see
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 118
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
119
page 70. If a message appears then this must
be acknowledged with READ for the menus to
be shown.
Menu overview6
To empty fuel tank
Average
Instantaneous
Average speed
Lane departure warning
Tyre pressure Calibration
City Safety
Current speed
Park heat timer 1/2
Park vent timer 1/2
Park timer mode
Direct start Park heat
Direct start Park el.heat
Direct start Park vent
Additional heat auto
Rest heat start
DSTC
Message
G 02
13 65
Text message in the information display.
When a warning, information or indicator sym-
bol illuminates, a corresponding message
appears on the information display. An error
message is stored in a memory list until the
fault is rectified.
Press READ to acknowledge and browse
between the messages.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press READ) before the previous activity can be resumed.
Message Specification
Stop safely Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage. Contact an
authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Stop engine Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage. Contact an
authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Service urgent Have the car checked
by an authorised Volvo
workshop immediately.
Service
required
Have the car checked
by an authorised Volvo
workshop as soon as
possible.
See manual Read the owner's man-
ual.
Book time for
maintenance
Time to book regular
service at an authorised
Volvo workshop.
6 Certain menu options*.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 119
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
120
Message Specification
Time for regular
maintenance
Time for regular service
at an authorised Volvo
workshop. The timing is
determined by the num-
ber of kilometres driven,
number of months
since the last service,
engine running time and
oil grade.
Maintenance
overdue
If the service intervals
are not followed then
the warranty does not
cover any damaged
parts. Contact an
authorised Volvo work-
shop for service.
Temporarily
OFF
A function has been
temporarily switched
off and is reset auto-
matically while driving
or after starting again.
Power save
mode
The audio system is
switched off to save
energy. Charge the bat-
tery.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 120
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121
General
Air conditioning The car is equipped with Electronic Climate
Control* (ECC) or Electronic Temperature Con-
trol (ETC). The climate control system cools or
heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the pas-
senger compartment.
NOTE
The air conditioning can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compartment and to pre- vent the windows from misting, it should always be on.
Actual temperature The temperature you select corresponds to the
physical experience with reference to factors
such as air speed, humidity and solar radia-
tion* in and around the car.
The system includes a sun sensor* which
detects on which side the sun is shining into
the passenger compartment. This means that
the temperature can differ between the right
and left-hand air vents despite the controls
being set for the same temperature on both
sides.
Sensor location
The sun sensor* is located on the top side of the dashboard.
The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel.
The outside temperature sensor is located on the door mirror.
The humidity sensor* is located in the inte- rior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.
Side windows and sunroof To ensure that the air conditioning works opti-
mally, the side windows, and sunroof if appro-
priate, should be closed.
Misting windows Remove misting on the insides of the windows
by primarily using the defroster function.
To reduce the risk of misting, keep the win-
dows clean and use window cleaner.
Temporary shut-off of the air
conditioning When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full
acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the
air conditioning can be temporarily switched
off. There may then be a temporary increase in
temperature in the passenger compartment.
Condensation In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal.
Ice and snow Remove ice and snow from the climate control
system air intake (the grille between the bonnet
and the windscreen).
Fault tracing and repair Entrust fault tracing and repair of the climate
control system to an authorised Volvo work-
shop only.
Refrigerant The climate control system contains R134a
refrigerant, see also page 273. This refrigerant
contains no chlorine, which means that it is
harmless to the ozone layer. Have an author-
ised Volvo workshop carry out the filling/
changing of refrigerant.
Total airing function The function opens/closes all side windows
simultaneously and can be used for example to
quickly air the car during hot weather, see
page 44.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 121
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Passenger compartment filter All air entering the car's passenger compart-
ment is cleaned with a filter. This must be
replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo
Service Programme for the recommended
replacement intervals. If the car is used in a
severely contaminated environment, it may be
necessary to replace the filter more often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger com- partment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* This option keeps the passenger compartment
clear of allergy and asthma inducing sub-
stances. For more information on CZIP, see the
brochure included with the purchase of the car.
The following is included:
An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is opened with the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is dis- engaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened. The amount of time the fan runs
is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old.
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). A fully automatic system that cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contami- nants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone.
Use of tested materials in the interior
equipment. The materials have been developed in order to
minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and they contribute to making
the passenger compartment easier to keep
clean. The carpets in both the passenger com-
partment and the cargo area are removable
and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning
agents and car care products recommended
by Volvo, see page 265.
NOTE
In cars with CZIP the IAQS air filter must be replaced every 15000 km or once per year. In cars without CZIP the IAQS air filter must be replaced at the normal service.
Menu settings It is possible to change the default settings for
three of the climate control system's functions
via the centre console, see page 116:
Fan speed in automatic mode*, see page 125.
Recirculation timer for passenger com- partment air, see page 126.
Automatic rear window defrosting, see page 91.
All climate control system functions are set to
original position with RESET via the display.
Air distribution
G 03
20 70
The incoming air is divided between
20 different vents in the passenger compart-
ment.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode*.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 122
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
123
If necessary it can be controlled manually, see
page 127.
Air vents in the dashboard
G 03
14 37
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents at the side windows to
remove misting.
A certain air flow always comes from the vents
in order to maintain a good climate in the pas-
senger compartment.
Air vents in the door pillars
G 03
32 02
Closed
Open
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist-
ing.
Aim the vents into the passenger compartment
to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear
seat.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sen- sitive to air flows and draughts.
Climate control
Electronic Temperature Control, ETC
Fan
Air distribution
Heated front seats, left-hand side
Heated front seats, right-hand side
Temperature control
AC ON/OFF Air conditioning On/Off
Rear window and door mirror defrosters,
see page 91
Max. defroster
Recirculation
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 123
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Electronic climate control, ECC
G 03
32 03
Fan
Air distribution
Heated front seats, left-hand side
AUTO
Heated front seats, right-hand side
Temperature control, right-hand side
AC ON/OFF Air conditioning On/Off
Rear window and door mirror defrosters,
see page 91
Max. defroster
Recirculation/Air quality system
Temperature control, left-hand side
Operation
Fan 1
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected then fan speed is
regulated automatically. The
previously set fan speed is
disengaged.
NOTE
If the fan is fully disengaged the air condi- tioning is not engaged which may result in a risk of misting windows.
Heated seats*
Front seats Press the button once for the
highest heat level three
lamps illuminate.
Press the button twice for a
lower heat level two lamps
illuminate.
Press the button three times for the lowest heat
level one lamp illuminates.
Press the button four times to switch off the
heat no lamps illuminate.
Rear seats
G 02
13 76
Heat control takes place in the same way as for
the front seat 2.
Air distribution The figure consists of three
buttons. When the buttons
are pressed a lamp in front of
the respective part of the fig-
ure illuminates and shows
which air distribution is
selected, see page 127.
1 Only applies to ECC. 2 Not included if 2-stage booster cushion is selected.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 124
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
125
Auto1
The Auto function automati-
cally regulates temperature,
air conditioning, fan speed,
recirculation, and air distribu-
tion.
If you select one or more manual functions, the
other functions continue to be controlled auto-
matically. The air quality sensor is engaged and
all manual settings are switched off when
AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTO
CLIMATE.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set under
Climate settings Automatic blower
adjust. Select between Low, Normal or
High.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 116.
Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflow is prioritised.
Normal - Automatic fan control.
High - Automatic fan control. A more intense airflow is prioritised.
Temperature control ECC: The temperatures on
the driver and passenger
sides can be set independ-
ently.
ETC: The whole of the pas-
senger compartment is regu-
lated using the knob.
When the car is started, the most recent setting
is resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher/lower temperature than the actual temperature required.
AC Air conditioning on/off ON: The air conditioning is
controlled by the system's
Auto function. This way,
incoming air is cooled and
dehumidified.
OFF: When the defroster
function is activated the air conditioning is
switched on automatically (can be switched off
using the AC button).
Defroster Used to quickly remove mist-
ing and ice from the wind-
screen and side windows. Air
flowing to the windows. The
light in the defroster button
illuminates when the function
is active.
The following also takes place in order to pro-
vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-
ger compartment:
the air conditioning is automatically engaged
recirculation and the air quality system are automatically disengaged.
The air conditioning can be disengaged man-
ually using the AC button. When the defroster
function is switched off the climate control sys-
tem returns to the previous settings.
1 Only applies to ECC.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 125
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Recirculation/Air quality system
Recirculation ECC - The right-hand orange
light in the button illuminates
when recirculation is
engaged. The function is
selected to shut out bad air,
exhaust gases etc. from the
passenger compartment. The
air in the passenger compartment is recircula-
ted, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when
this function is activated.
ETC - The right-hand orange
light in the button illuminates
when recirculation is
engaged. The function is
selected to shut out bad air,
exhaust gases etc. from the
passenger compartment. The
air in the passenger compartment is recircula-
ted, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when
this function is activated.
NOTE
If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
Timer With the timer function activated the system
will exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the out-
side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the
function under Climate settings
Recirculation timer. For a description of the
menu system, see page 116.
NOTE
When Defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.
Air quality system* The air quality system sepa-
rates gases and particles to
reduce the levels of odours
and pollution in the passenger
compartment. If the outside
air is contaminated then the
air intake is closed and the air
is recirculated. When the AUTO button is
depressed the air quality sensor is always
engaged.
Activating recirculation/air quality
sensor 3
Switch between the three
functions by pressing the but-
ton repeatedly.
The left-hand orange lamp illuminates the air quality sensor is disengaged. There is no recirculation, only fresh air.
The centre green lamp illuminates recir- culation not engaged, providing it is not required for cooling in hot weather.
The right-hand orange lamp illuminates recirculation is engaged.
NOTE
The air quality sensor should always be engaged in order to obtain the best air in the passenger compartment.
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting.
If the insides of the windows start misting up, disengage the air quality sensor, and the defroster functions for the windscreen, the side and the rear windows should also be used to demist the windows.
3 Only applies to ECC.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 126
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
127
Activating recirculation Switch between recircula-
tion3 On/Off by pressing the button repeatedly.
The lamp illuminates when recirculation is
engaged.
Air distribution table
Air distribution Use Air distribution Use
Air to windows. Some air
flows from the air vents.
The air is not recirculated.
Air conditioning is always
engaged.
to remove ice and misting
quickly.
Air to the floor and win-
dows. Some air flows
from the dashboard air
vents.
to ensure comfortable
conditions and good
demisting in cold or
humid weather.
Air to windscreen and
side windows. Some air
flows from the air vents.
to prevent misting and
icing in a cold and humid
climate, (not at too low fan
speed to enable this).
Air to floor and from dash-
board air vents.
in sunny weather with
cool outside tempera-
tures.
3 Only applies to ECC.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 127
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
128
Air distribution Use Air distribution Use
Airflow to windows and
from dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort in
warm, dry weather.
Air to floor. Some air flows
to the dashboard air vents
and windows.
to direct heat or cold to
the floor
Airflow to the head and
chest from the dashboard
air vents.
to ensure efficient cooling
in warm weather.
Airflow to windows, from
dashboard air vents and
to the floor.
to provide cooler air along
the floor or warmer air
higher up in cold weather
or hot, dry weather.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 128
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129
Fuel-driven heater
General information about the parking
heater The parking heater heats the engine and pas-
senger compartment and can be started
directly or with the timer.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car
is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys-
tem calculates when heating should be started
based on the outside temperature.
The heater cannot start if the outside tempera-
ture exceeds 15 C. At 10 C or lower the
maximum running time of the parking heater is
50 minutes.
WARNING
The car must be outdoors when the parking heater is used.
NOTE
When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel hous- ing, which is perfectly normal.
Refuelling
WARNING! AVERTISSEMENT!
ACHTUNG!
G 03
13 91
Warning decal on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out can be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.
Check the information display to see that the parking heater is switched off. When it is running, the information display shows Park heat ON.
Parking on a hill If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.
Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel
level is too low, the parking heater will be
switched off automatically and a message
appears on the information display. Acknowl-
edge the message by pressing the indicator
stalk READ button once, see page 130.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater com- bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting.
The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car's battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 129
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
04
130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operation
G 02
13 64
READ button
Thumbwheel
RESET button
For more information on the information dis-
play and READ, see page 118.
Symbols and display messages
When one of the timer's settings or
Direct start is activated, the infor-
mation symbol in the combined instrument
panel illuminates while the information display
shows an explanatory text and a further illumi-
nated symbol. The table shows symbols and
display texts that appear.
Sym- bol
Display Specification
G 02
51 02
Fuel
heater ON
The heater is
switched on and run-
ning.
G 02
51 02
Timer is
set for
Fuel
heater
Reminder that the
heater will start at
the set time after the
car has been left,
when the remote
control key is
removed from the
ignition switch.
G 02
51 02
Heater
stopped
Low bat-
tery
The heater has been
stopped by the car's
electronics in order
to facilitate starting
the engine.
Sym- bol
Display Specification
G 02
51 02
Heater
unavail.
Low fuel
level
The heater has been
stopped by the car's
electronics in order
to facilitate starting
the engine and
about 50 km driving.
G 02
51 02
Park
heater
Service
required
Heater not working.
Contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop
for repair.
A display text clears automatically after a time
or after one press on the indicator stalk
READ button.
Direct start and immediate stop
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start
Park heat.
2. Press RESET to select between ON and
OFF.
ON: Parking heater switched on manually or
with programmed timer.
OFF: Parking heater switched off.
Following the direct start of the heater it will be
activated for 50 minutes.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 130
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131
Heating of the passenger compartment will
begin as soon as the engine coolant has
reached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the parking heater is running.
Setting the timer
The time when the car shall be used and heated
is specified with the timer.
Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.
NOTE
The timer can only be programmed when the remote control key is in key position I, see page 70.
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heat
timer 1.
2. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-
ing hours setting.
3. Select the required hour using the thumb-
wheel.
4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-
ing minutes setting.
5. Select the required minute using the
thumbwheel.
6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.
7. Press RESET to activate the timer.
After setting Park heat timer 1 a second start
time can be programmed with Park heat timer
2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel.
Set the alternative time in the same way as
Park heat timer 1.
Deactivating a timer-started heater A timer-started heater can be switched off
manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Press READ.
2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text
Park heat timer 1 or 2.
> The text ON flashes on the display.
3. Press RESET.
> The text OFF is shown with a constant
glow and the heater is switched OFF.
A timer-started heater can be switched off in
accordance with the instructions in the section
"Direct start and immediate stop", see
page 130.
Clock/timer The heater's time is connected to the car's
clock.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 131
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven additional heater*
04
132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Additional heater (diesel)
G 02
13 64
READ button
Thumbwheel
RESET button
In diesel-engined cars the additional heater
may be required for achieving the correct tem-
perature in the passenger compartment during
cold weather.
The heater starts automatically when extra
heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when
the correct temperature is reached or when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
When the additional heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel housing which is perfectly normal.
Auto mode or shutdown The additional heater can be switched off for
short distances if required.
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional
heat auto.
2. Press RESET to select between ON and
OFF.
Passenger compartment heater* If the additional heater is supplemented with
timer function then it will be a fuel-driven pas-
senger compartment heater, see page 129.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 132
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133
General
The audio system can be equipped with differ-
ent options and is one of the following three
basic versions:
Performance
High Performance
Premium Sound
The system version is shown in the display
when the audio system is started.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolby
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
Surround Pro Logic II System is manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Remote control key and ignition
positions The audio system can be used without the
remote control key in the ignition switch for
15 minutes at a time.
NOTE
Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch if the audio system is used when the engine is switched off. This is to avoid discharging the battery unnecessar- ily.
If the audio system is active when the engine is
switched off then it is activated automatically
next time the engine is started.
Overview
5 G 03
14 38
Input for external audio source; AUX and
USB (e.g. iPod )1
Steering wheel keypad
Information display
Centre console control panel
Control panel with headphones socket*
Steering wheel keypad
G 02
13 99
Confirm selection in menu system, accept
phone call.
Lead up in menu system. Interrupt current
function, end/refuse phone calls, clear
entered characters.
Volume
A short press scrolls between CD tracks or
preset radio stations. A long press fast-
winds CD tracks or seeks the next availa-
ble radio station.
1 USB only applies for High Performance and Premium Sound. The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 133
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Rear control panel with headphones socket
Headphones with an impedance of
16-32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher
are recommended for best sound reproduc-
tion.
VOLUME Volume, left and right.
Scroll/search forward and backward.
MODE - Select between AM, FM, CD,
AUX, USB*/iPod, DAB1/DAB2* and On/
Off. For connection via AUX or USB, see
page 133.
Headphones sockets (3.5 mm).
Activating/deactivating The control panel is activated with MODE.
Deactivation is possible via a long press on
MODE or when the engine is switched off.
Scroll/search forward and backward
A short press on scrolls between CD tracks
or preset radio stations. A long press fast-
winds CD tracks or seeks the next available
radio station.
Limitations
The audio source (FM, AM, CD etc.) played back in the speakers cannot be controlled from the rear control panel.
Menus and MY KEY2
Some functions are controlled from the menu
system in the centre console. For more infor-
mation on menus, see page 116. For informa-
tion on the audio system's functions together
with BluetoothTM handsfree or phone, see
page 194.
Store favourite functions with MY KEY
G 03
14 39
1. Navigate to the function to be stored in the
menu. Only a selection of the functions can
be stored.
2. Hold MY KEY depressed for more than
2 seconds.
The following functions can be stored
with MY KEY:
CD/CD changer
Random
News
TP
Track information
2 MY KEY is not available if the car is equipped with built-in phone as an option.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 134
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 135
FM
News
TP
Radio text
Search PTY
Show PTY text
Audio settings
Audio mode
Auto. volume control
Activate the stored function with a short press
on MY KEY.
Audio functions
G 03
14 40
Centre console, controls for audio functions.
AM, FM and CD - Internal audio sources.
MODE - Scroll between external audio
sources (AUX, USB* and DAB1/DAB2*).
For connection via AUX or USB, see
page 133.
SOUND Push button and knob controls
for adjusting the sound pattern.
Navigation button
VOLUME - Volume and On/Off.
Audio volume and automatic volume
control The audio system compensates for disrupting
noises in the passenger compartment by
increasing the volume in proportion to vehicle
speed. The level of compensation can be set
at low, medium or high. Select the level under
Audio settings Auto. volume control.
Audio controls
Press the control repeatedly to browse
among the following listed options. Adjustment
is made by turning the control.
NOTE
Press MENU to access other audio set- tings. For more information, see page 116.
Bass - Bass level.
Treble - Treble level.
Fader Balance between the front and rear speakers.
Balance Balance between the left and right-hand speakers.
Subwoofer* Subwoofer level. MIN deactivates the subwoofer.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 135
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G 03
19 60
Subwoofer location.
Surround* Surround settings.
Under Surround 3 channel stereo or Dolby
Surround Pro Logic II can be activated by
selecting 3-channel or DPLII respectively.
This enables the following options:
Centre level* Level for centre speaker.
Surround level* Level for surround.
Equalizer* The equalizer can be used to adjust different
frequency bands separately.
1. Go to Audio settings and select
Equalizer front or Equalizer rear.
The sound level for the wavelength is
adjusted with / on the navigation
button. Press / to select another
wavelength.
2. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.
Sound stage* The sound experience can be optimised for the
driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat.
Select one of the options under
Audio settings Sound stage.
Optimum sound reproduction The audio system is calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing.
This calibration takes into account loudspeak-
ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position etc. for each com-
bination of car model and audio system.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes
into account the position of the volume control,
radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls explained in these operating
instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and
Equalizer, are only intended for the user to be
able to adapt the sound reproduction accord-
ing to personal taste.
External audio source audio volume The AUX input can be used for connecting an
MP3 player which has no USB connection for
example, see page 133.
NOTE
The audio quality may be impaired if the player is charged while the audio system is in AUX mode. In which case, avoid charging the player via the 12 V socket.
The audio source connected to the AUX input
may have a different volume to the internal
audio sources. Correct this by adjusting the
input volume of the AUX input:
1. Set the audio system in AUX mode using
MODE and navigate with to AUX input
volume.
2. Turn the control or press / the
navigation button.
Resetting the audio functions All audio settings can be reset to the original
factory settings.
The reset is carried out in FM mode under
Audio settings Advanced audio sett.
Reset all.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 136
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137
AUX, USB and iPod *
General
G 03
19 59
An iPod or MP3 player can be connected to the car's infotainment system via the AUX socket or the USB connection in the centre console.
The AUX input enables the connection of an
external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3
player.
If you choose to connect an iPod , MP3 player
or a USB memory stick to the USB connection
then you can control the media via the car's
audio controls.
Use the MODE button to select:
1. If USB is selected then Connect Device is shown in the display. For information on
the AUX input, see page 133.
2. Connect your iPod , MP3 player or USB
memory stick to the USB connection in the
centre console's storage compartment
(see preceding illustration).
The text Loading is shown in the display when
the system is loading the storage media's file
structure. This takes a moment.
Once loading is complete, track information is
shown on the display and the desired track can
be selected.
A track can be selected in two ways:
1. Turn TUNING clockwise or anticlock-
wise
2. or use the navigation control's right or
left-hand button to scroll to the required
track.
It is also possible to change track using the
steering wheel keypad
In USB or iPod mode the infotainment system
operates in an equivalent way to the CD player
playing back music files. For more information,
see page 139.
NOTE
The system supports the playback of music files in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats. However, there are variants of these file for- mats that are not supported by the system. The system also supports the majority of iPod models produced in 2005 or later. iPod Shuffle is not supported.
USB memory To facilitate use of a USB memory, only store
music files on it. It takes a lot longer for the
system to load storage media that contains
anything other than compatible music files.
NOTE
The system supports removable media which is compatible with USB 2.0 and the file system FAT32. The player or USB mem- ory stick can hold a maximum of 500 folders and 64 000 files, and must have a capacity of at least 128 Mb.
MP3 player Many MP3 players have their own file systems
that are not supported by the audio system. For
use in the system, an MP3 player must be set
in USB Removable device/Mass Storage
Device mode.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 137
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
iPod An iPod is charged and supplied with power
by the USB connection, via the player's con-
nection cable. However, if the player's battery
is fully discharged then it must be charged
before being connected.
NOTE
When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's infotainment system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player's own menu structure.
For information on USB/iPod in combination
with Performance audio, see the accessory
CD functions
G 03
14 43
Centre console, controls for CD functions.
CD eject
CD insertion/eject slot
Fast-wind and change CD track
Navigation button for changing CD tracks
Scan CD
CD changer position selection (only
applies to the High Performance and Pre-
mium Sound audio systems)*
Starting playback (CD player) Start CD playback by pressing the CD button.
If a music CD is in the player when this takes
place then playback is started automatically.
Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD.
Starting playback (CD changer) If a CD position with a music CD is already
selected when CD is pressed then playback
starts automatically. Otherwise, select a disc
with the number buttons 1-6 or / on the
navigation button.
Insert a CD (CD changer) 1. Select an empty position with the number
buttons 1-6 or / on the navigation
button.
An empty position is marked on the dis-
play. The text Insert disc shows that a new
disc can be inserted. The CD changer can
hold up to six CDs.
2. Insert a CD in the CD changer slot.
Disc eject A CD will stay in the ejected position for
approx. 12seconds. Following which it is re-
inserted in the player and playback continues.
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but-
ton.
Eject all discs with a long press on the eject
button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by
disc.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 138
evastarck
manual for USB and iPod Music Interface.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139
Pause When the volume is lowered all the way, the CD
player stops if no one is using headphones.
When the volume is increased, it starts again.
Audio files3
The CD player also supports compressed
audio files in MP3 and WMA formats.
NOTE
Some copy protected audio files may not be read by the player.
When a CD with audio files is inserted into the
player the disc's file structure is loaded.
Depending on the quality of the disc and the
quantity of information there may be a delay
before playback starts.
Navigation and playback If a disc containing audio files is inside the CD
player then ENTER leads to the disc's file
structure. The file structure is navigated in the
same way as the audio system's menu struc-
ture. Audio files have the symbol and
directories have the symbol . Start audio
file playback with ENTER.
When the playback of a file is finished the play-
back of the other files in the same directory
continues. Directory change takes place auto-
matically when all files in the current directory
have been played back.
Fast wind/change CD tracks and
compressed audio files
Short presses / on the navigation button
are used to scroll between CD tracks or com-
pressed audio files. Long presses are used to
fast-wind CD tracks or compressed audio files.
The steering wheel keypad can also be used
for this purpose. Track change can also be
made by turning TUNING.
Scan CD This function plays back the first ten seconds
of each CD track or compressed audio file.
Press SCAN to activate. Interrupt with EXIT or
SCAN to continue playback of the current CD
track or compressed audio file.
Random This function plays the tracks in random order.
The random CD tracks or compressed audio
files can be scrolled through in the normal way.
NOTE
It is only possible to scroll between random CD tracks on the current disc.
Different messages appear depending on
which random function has been selected:
RANDOM means that the tracks from only one music CD are played
RND ALL means that all tracks on all music CDs in the CD changer* are played.
RANDOM FOLDER means that the com- pressed audio files in a directory on the current CD are played back.
CD player If a normal music CD is being played, activate/
deactivate under Random.
If a disc with compressed audio files is being
played back, activate/deactivate under
Random Folder.
CD changer If a normal music CD is being played under
Random Single disc or Random All
discs. The All discs option applies to all music
CDs in the changer.
If a CD with audio files is being played, activate/
deactivate under Random Folder. If you
select another CD the function is deactivated.
Track information If track information is stored on a music CD
then it can be shown on the display. This also
3 High Performance and Premium Sound
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 139
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
140
applies to MP3 and WMA files for Premium
Sound and High Performance. Activate/deac-
tivate in CD mode under CD settings Track
information.
Radio functions
G 03
14 41
Centre console, controls for radio functions.
Navigation button for tuning, automatic
Cancel function in progress
Tuning, manual
Scan wavelength
Preset storage, automatic
Preset buttons and preset storage, manual
Select wavelength AM and FM (FM1 and
FM2)
Tuning, automatic 1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.
2. Press / on the navigation button.
Tuning, manual 1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.
2. Turn TUNING.
Preset 10 station presets can be stored per wave-
length. FM has 2 memories for presets: FM1
and FM2. The stored presets are selected
using the preset buttons.
Preset storage can be carried out manually or
automatically.
Preset storage, manual 1. Set a station or frequency.
2. Hold in a station preset button until the
message Channel stored appears on the
display.
Preset storage, automatic The function is especially useful in areas where
the radio stations and their frequencies are
unfamiliar. The 10 strongest radio stations are
stored automatically in a separate memory.
Autostoring does not affect the manually
stored stations.
1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.
2. Hold in AUTO until Autostoring.. appears
on the display.
Once Autostoring.. disappears from the dis-
play, the stations are stored. The radio contin-
ues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the
display. The automatically stored presets can
now be selected using the preset buttons.
Automatic preset storage can be cancelled
using EXIT.
Auto mode is cancelled by pressing for exam-
ple AUTO or FM.
Returning to Auto mode provides access to the
autostored presets:
1. Press AUTO.
> Auto appears on the display.
2. Press a preset button.
Scan wavelength The function automatically searches the cur-
rent wavelength for strong stations. When a
station is found, it is played for approx. 8 sec-
onds before scanning is resumed.
1. Select wavelength using AM or FM.
2. Press SCAN.
SCAN appears on the display. Close using
SCAN or EXIT.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 140
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
141
RDS functions RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters
into a network. An FM transmitter in such a
network sends information that gives an RDS
radio the following functions:
Automatically switches to a stronger trans- mitter if reception in the area is poor.
Searches for programme type, e.g. news.
Receives text information on current radio programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only some if its functionality.
If a required programme type is located the
radio can switch stations interrupting the audio
source currently in use. For example, if the CD
player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting
transmission is played at a preset volume, see
page 142. The radio returns to the previous
audio source and volume when the set pro-
gramme type is no longer broadcast.
The programme functions alarm (ALARM), traf-
fic information (TP), news (NEWS), and pro-
gramme types(PTY) interrupt one another in
order of priority, where alarm has the highest
priority and programme types has the lowest.
For further programme interruption settings
(EON and REG), see page 142. Press EXIT to
return to the interrupted audio source.
Alarm This function is used to warn of serious acci-
dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be
temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The
message ALARM! appears on the display
when an alarm message is transmitted.
Traffic information TP This function allows traffic information sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The TP symbol indicates that the
function is activated. If the set station can send
traffic information then appears on the
display.
Activate/deactivate under FM settings
TP.
TP from selected station/all stations The radio can interrupt with traffic information
only from the pre-selected station or all sta-
tions within the same network.
Go to FM settings Advanced radio
settings TP TP Station to change.
News This function allows news broadcasts sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The NEWS symbol indicates that the
function is active.
Activate/deactivate under FM settings
News.
News from selected/all stations The radio can interrupt with news only from the
pre-selected station or all stations within the
same network.
Go to FM settings Advanced radio
settings News station to change.
Programme types PTY The PTY function can be used to select differ-
ent programme types, such as pop music and
serious classic. The PTY symbol indicates that
the function is active. This function allows pro-
gramme types broadcast within a set station's
RDS network to break through.
1. Activate in FM mode by selecting a pro-
gramme type under FM settings PTY
Select PTY.
2. Deactivate by clearing the PTYs under FM
settings Clear all PTY.
PTY search This function searches the entire wavelength
for the selected programme type.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 141
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
142
1. Select one or more PTYs under FM
settings PTY Select PTY.
2. Go to FM settings PTY Search
PTY.
If the radio finds any of the selected pro-
gramme types, >| To seek appears on the
display.
To continue searching for another broad-
cast of the selected programme types,
press on the navigation button.
Display of programme type The programme type of the current station can
be shown on the display.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
settings PTY Show PTY
Radio text Some RDS stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This informa-
tion can be shown on the display.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
Radio text.
Advanced radio settings
Automatic frequency update AF This function selects one of the strongest
transmitters for a set station. The function may
need to search through the entire FM wave-
length to find a strong transmitter. If this
occurs, the radio mutes and PI Seek appears
on the display. Press EXIT to cancel, which is
also shown in the display.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
settings Advanced radio settings
AF.
Regional radio programmes - Regional This function causes the radio to continue with
a regional transmitter even if its signal strength
is low. The symbol Regional shows that the
function is active.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
settings Advanced radio settings
Regional.
Enhanced Other Networks EON This function is useful in urban areas with many
regional radio stations. It allows the distance
between the car and the radio station trans-
mitter to determine when programme functions
should interrupt the current audio source.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode by select-
ing one of the options under FM settings
Advanced radio settings EON:
Local interrupts only if the radio station transmitter is close.
Distant4 interrupts if the station trans- mitter is far away, even if the signal is weak.
Off no interruption for programmes from other transmitters.
Resetting RDS functions All radio settings can be reset to the original
factory settings.
The reset is carried out in FM mode under
FM settings Advanced radio settings
Reset all.
Volume control, programme types The interrupting programme types, e.g. NEWS
or TP, are heard at the volume selected for
each respective programme type. If the volume
level is adjusted during the programme inter-
ruption, the new level is saved until the next
programme interruption. There is, however, a
minimum level.
4 Factory settings.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 142
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143
Menu structure FM
Main menu FM FM settings
1.1 News
1.2 TP (Traffic information)
1.3 Radio text
1.4 PTY (Program type)
1.4.1 Select PTY
Clear all PTY
Current affairs
Information
Sport
Education
Drama
Culture & Art
Science
Varied speech
Pop music
Rock music
Easy listening
Light classic
Classical
Other music
Weather & metro
Finance
Children's programs
Social affairs
Religion
Phone in
Travel & touring
Leisure & hobby
Jazz music
Country music
National music
Oldies music
Folk music
Documentary
Alarm test
!!Alarm!!
1.4.2 Search PTY
1.4.3 Show PTY text
1.5. Advanced radio settings
1.5.1 TP station
1.5.2 News station
1.5.3 AF
1.5.4 EON
Off
Local
Distant
1.5.5 Regional
1.5.6 Reset FM sett.
Radio system - DAB*
General DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital
broadcasting system for radio.
NOTE
This system does not support DAB+.
Service and Ensemble
Service - Channel, radio channel (only audio services are supported by the sys- tem).
Ensemble - A collection of radio channels on the same frequency.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 143
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
144
Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn) When the vehicle is moved to a new broad-
casting area, programming of existing channel
groups in the area can take place.
Programming of channel groups creates an
updated list of all available channel groups.
The list is not updated automatically. Program-
ming takes place via the Ensemble learn menu or directly by means of a long press on
AUTO. If can take up to a minute to program a
channel group if both Band III and LBand are
selected.
Wavelength
DAB is transmitted on two wavelengths5; Band
III and LBand.
Band III over the whole country6
LBand - mainly in large cities
By selecting for example Band III on its own,
channel programming takes place more
quickly than if both Band III and LBand are
selected. It is not certain that all channel
groups will be found. Wavelength selection
does not affect the stored memories.
Navigation via lists There are three types of basic list which can be
used for navigation:
Ensemble list - Shows channel groups that the receiver has obtained via channel group programming.
Service list - Shows channels irrespective of the channel group to which they are allo- cated. The list can also be filtered using DAB PTY (see below).
Subchannel list - Subchannels to a selected channel.
The lists can be accessed via the menu. The
channel groups can also be accessed by
pressing ENTER.
Scanning Scanning means that all channels in the list are
played for 10 seconds each.
Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY
mode. In which case only channels of the pre-
selected programme type are played.
Stop scanning by pressing SCAN once, or
by pressing EXIT.
Subchannel Secondary components are usually named
subchannels. These are temporary and can
contain e.g. translations of the main pro-
gramme into other languages.
If one or more subchannels are broadcast then
the > symbol is shown to the right of the chan-
nel name in the display. A subchannel is indi-
cated by the > symbol appearing to the left of
the channel name in the display.
To access a subchannel:
Press
To navigate between subchannels:
Press or
Subchannels can only be accessed on the
selected main channel and not on any other
one without selecting it.
DAB PTY (program type) DAB PTY selects one type of radio pro-
gramme. There are 29 different programme
types which also include different programme
categories. After selecting a programme type,
navigation only takes place within the channels
broadcasting that type.
Exit this mode as follows:
Press EXIT
It is also possible to select a preset channel or
exit DAB-PTY via the menu. In certain cases
DAB radio will exit PTY mode when DAB to
DAB linking (see below) is implemented.
5 Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths. 6 During a build-up phase DAB will not cover the whole country but will only work in larger urban areas.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 144
evastarck
Press SCAN to activate.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
145
DAB to DAB link It is possible to exit a channel with poor or no
reception to the same channel in another chan-
nel group with better reception. There may be
a certain delay when changing channel group.
There may be a period of silence between the
current channel no longer being available to the
new channel becoming available.
DAB display settings 1. Basic - Only the channel name is shown if
a primary component is being played. A
subchannel name is shown if it is a sub-
channel being played
2. Ensemble mode - Adds the channel
group name to the channel name
3. Ensemble + PTY - Adds the programme
type name under the channel name
Preset 10 station presets can be stored per wave-
length. DAB has 2 memories for presets:
DAB1 and DAB2. The stored presets are
selected using the preset buttons.
A preset contains one channel but no sub-
channels. If a subchannel is being played and
a preset is saved then only the channel ID is
registered. This is because subchannels are
temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve the
preset, the channel which contained the sub-
channel will be played. The preset is not
dependent on the channel list.
A saved channel does not have to be in the
channel list for it to be playable. If the channel
is loaded when it is not available then a preset
number is shown and there is silence until an
available preset is selected for loading. Alter-
natively another channel.
NOTE
The audio system's DAB system does not support all functions available in the DAB standard.
Menu structure DAB
Main menu DAB
1. Select ensemble
2. Select service
3. Select subchannel
4. DAB PTY
4.1. DAB PTY off
4.2. News
4.3. Current affairs
4.4. Information
4.5. Sport
4.6. Education
4.7. Drama
4.8. Culture & Art
4.9. Science
4.10. Varied speech
4.11. Pop music
4.12 Rock music
4.13. Easy listening
4.14. Light classic
4.15. Serious classic
4.16. Other music
4.17. Weather & metro
4.18. Finance
4.19 Children's programs
4.20. Social affairs
4.21. Religion
4.22. Phone in
4.23. Travel & touring
4.24. Leisure & hobby
4.25. Jazz music
4.26. Country music
4.27. National music
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 145
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
146
4.28. Oldies music
4.29. Folk music
4.30. Documentary
4.31. Alarm test
4.32. !!Alarm!!
5. Ensemble learn
6. DAB settings
6.1. DAB settings
6.1.1. Ensemble name
6.1.2. Ensemble name and
PTY
6.1.3. Basic
6.2. DAB to DAB link
6.3. FM traffic
6.4. Select DAB band
6.4.1. Band III
6.4.2. LBand
6.4.3. LBand & Band III
6.5. Reset DAB
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 146
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147
General
G 02
13 64
Information display and controls.
READ - confirms
Thumbwheel browse between menus
and options in the trip computer list
RESET resets
To scroll through trip computer information,
turn the thumbwheel up or down in steps. Con-
tinue turning to return to the starting point.
Functions
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged in order to revert to the trip computer function. Acknowledge by pressing READ.
To change unit specified for distance and
speed, contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Current speed* The instrument panel display shows current
speed in mph if the speedometer is graduated
in km/h. If the speedometer is graduated in
mph then the current speed is shown in km/h.
Average speed The car calculates the average speed from the
last resetting. Reset using RESET.
Instantaneous Current fuel consumption is calculated every
second. The information on the display is
updated every couple of seconds. When the
car is stationary, " ----" appears on the display.
Average The average fuel consumption since the last
reset. Reset using RESET.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven additional 1, and/or parking heater* has been used.
Km to empty tank The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display
shows the approximate distance that can be
driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the
tank. No guaranteed range remains when the
display shows " --- km to empty tank". Refuel
as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven parking heater* has been used or if driving style has been changed.
Resetting 1. Select Average speed or Average.
2. Press and hold RESET for
approx. 1 second to reset the selected
1 Diesel cars only.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 147
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
04
148
function. If RESET is kept depressed for at
least 3 three seconds then Average speed
and Average are reset simultaneously.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 148
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Compass*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149
Operation
G 03
16 11
Rearview mirror with compass.
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car
is pointing. Eight different directions are shown
with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
The compass is activated automatically when
the car is started or in ignition position IIsee
page 70. To deactivate/activate the compass -
press in the button on the underside of the
mirror using a paper clip for example.
Calibration The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass is set for the geographic area to
which the car was delivered. The compass
should be calibrated if the car is moved across
several magnetic zones.
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power
lines.
2. Start the car.
NOTE
For optimum calibration - switch off all elec- trical equipment (climate control system, wipers etc.) and make sure that all doors are closed.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror depressed
approx. 6 seconds (using a paper clip for
example) until the character C is shown.
G 03
02 95
Magnetic zones.
4. Hold the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror depressed
approx. 3 seconds. The number of the cur-
rent magnetic zone is shown.
5. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone ( 115) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the
compass.
6. Wait until the display resumes showing the
character C.
7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 10 km/h until a compass direc-
tion is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete. Then drive a further
2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 149
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
DSTC Stability and traction control system
04
150
General information on DSTC
The stability and traction control system, DSTC
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) helps
the driver to avoid skidding and improves the
car's traction.
The system limits the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually so that skidding can
be avoided. This increases manoeuvrability
and as a result safety in the event of sudden
movement.
Traction is improved by means of the system
distributing the driving force between the
wheels. The system primarily engages at low
speed on poor road surfaces.
The activation of the system during braking
may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car
may accelerate slower than expected when the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
Messages in the information display
DSTC Temporarily OFF System temporarily reduced due to excessive
brake disc temperature. The function is reacti-
vated automatically when the brakes have
cooled.
DSTC Service required System disabled due to a fault.
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine. If the message remains when the
engine is restarted, drive to an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
If the symbols and are displayed
at the same time, read the message on the
information display.
If the symbol appears alone then it may
appear as follows:
Flashing light means that the system is now being activated.
Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys- tem check when the engine is started.
Constant glow after starting the engine or while driving means system fault.
Reduced operation System operation during skidding and accel-
eration can be reduced. Operation during skid-
ding is delayed and so allows more skidding
which provides greater freedom for dynamic
driving. Traction in deep snow or sand is
improved as traction is no longer limited.
Operation
G 02
14 09
1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTC
menu is shown. DSTC ON means that the
system function is unchanged.
DSTC spin control OFF means that sys-
tem operation is reduced.
2. Press and hold RESET until the DSTC
menu is changed.
The system remains reduced until the engine is
next started.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics may dete- riorate if the function is reduced.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 150
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adapting driving characteristics
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151
Active chassis (Four C)*
Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously
Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the
characteristics of the shock absorbers so that
the car's driving characteristics can be
adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort,
Sport and Advanced.
Comfort This setting means that the car is perceived as
being more comfortable and is recommended
for longer journeys. Shock absorption is soft
and the movement of the body is smooth and
gentle.
Sport This setting means that the car is perceived as
being more sporty and is recommended for
more active driving. Steering response is faster
than in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is
harder and the body follows the road in order
to reduce rolling during fast cornering.
Advanced This setting is only recommended on very even
and smooth road surfaces.
The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi-
mum roadholding and rolling in bends is further
minimised.
Operation
G 03
13 92
Chassis settings.
Use the buttons in the centre console to
change setting. The setting in use when the
engine is switched off is activated next time the
engine is started.
Speed related steering force*
Steering force increases with the speed of the
car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. The
steering is firmer and more immediate on
motorways. Steering is light and requires no
extra effort when parking and at low speed.
Steering force can be set in three levels so that
you can select the level that suits you in terms
of road responsiveness or steering sensitivity.
Go to Car settings Steering force level in
the menu system.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 116. This menu cannot be accessed
while the car is in motion.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 151
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Cruise control*
04
152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operation
G 02
14 11
Display and controls.
Standby mode
Resume set speed
Deactivating
Activate/set speed
Set speed (in brackets = standby mode)
Activating and setting the speed In order to enable the activation of cruise con-
trol, it must first be engaged in standby mode
with the CRUISE button . The symbol
illuminates in the display and the text (---) km/
h shows that cruise control is in standby
mode.
Cruise control is then activated with or
after which the current speed is stored and is
used as the set speed. The display text
(---) km/h changes to show the set speed, e.g.
100 km/h.,
NOTE
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km/h.
Adjusting the set speed In active mode the speed is adjusted with long
or short presses on or .
A temporary increase in speed using the accel-
erator, such as while overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting. When the
accelerator is released the car will return to the
set speed.
NOTE
If one of the cruise control buttons is kept depressed for more than approx. one minute then cruise control is disengaged. The engine must then be switched off in order to then reset cruise control.
Deactivation Cruise control is disengaged with CRUISE or
by switching off the engine. The set speed is
cleared.
Temporary deactivation
Press On to disengage cruise control tem-
porarily. The saved speed is shown in brackets
in the display, e.g. (100) km/h.
Automatic temporary deactivation Cruise control is deactivated spontaneously
when the driving wheels spin or if the car's
speed falls below approx. ca 30 km/h. Cruise
control is also deactivated when the brakes are
used, when the gear selector is moved to neu-
tral position or if the accelerator pedal is
depressed for a longer time (approx. 60 sec-
onds). Cruise control then changes over to
standby mode and the set speed is saved.
Resume set speed If cruise control has been deactivated tempo-
rarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The
speed is then set to the previously set speed.
NOTE
A significant increase in speed may arise
after the speed has been resumed with .
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 152
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153
General
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is designed to
assist the driver with support on long straight
roads in steady traffic, for example on motor-
ways and main roads.
WARNING
You must always pay attention to the traffic conditions and intervene when adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
Adaptive cruise control cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions.
The Function section and after informs about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using the adaptive cruise control.
When driving you are responsible for main- taining the correct distance and speed, even when adaptive cruise control is used.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Function
G 03
13 93
Functions overview.
Warning lamp, braking by driver required
Controls
Radar sensor
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise
control system and a coordinated spacing sys-
tem.
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must inter- vene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.
Adaptive cruise control does not brake for people or animals. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/ snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.
The distance to the vehicle ahead is measured
by a radar sensor. The speed is regulated by
acceleration and braking. It is normal for the
brakes to emit a low sound when they are being
used by cruise control.
WARNING
The brake pedal moves when the cruise control brakes. Do not rest your foot under the brake pedal as it could become trapped.
The cruise control objective is to follow the
vehicle ahead but in the same lane and at a set
time interval. If the radar sensor has not
detected a vehicle ahead then the only objec-
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 153
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
tive is the set speed. This is also the case if the
speed of the vehicle ahead exceeds the cruise
control set speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the
speed in a smooth way. In situations that
demand sudden braking you must brake your-
self. This applies with large differences in
speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily.
Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking
may come unexpectedly or not at all, see
page 156.
Adaptive cruise control can only be activated
above 30 km/h. If speed falls below 30 km/h or
if engine speed becomes too slow, then the
adaptive cruise control disengages and stops
braking. In which case the driver must imme-
diately take over and maintain the distance to
vehicles in front. The highest speed setting is
200 km/h.
Warning lamp, braking by driver required Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity
that is equivalent to approximately 30% of the
car's braking capacity.
If the car needs to brake more heavily than
cruise control capacity and the driver does not
brake, then the cruise control uses the collision
warning system's warning lamp and warning
sound to alert the driver that immediate inter-
vention is required.
NOTE
The warning lamp may be difficult to notice in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are being worn.
WARNING
Cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor. Consequently there may be no warning or it may be sub- ject to a delay. Do not wait for a warning but brake when it is necessary.
Operation
G 01
73 50
Display and controls.
Activate and resume settings, increase
speed
Standby mode, on/off
Set time interval
Activating and setting the speed
Set speed (in brackets = standby mode)
Set time interval during adjustment
Set time interval after adjustment
Activating and setting the speed In order to enable the activation of cruise con-
trol, it must first be engaged in standby mode
with the button . The symbol illuminates
in the display and the characters (---) show
that cruise control is in standby mode.
Cruise control is then activated with or ,
after which the current speed is stored and is
used as the set speed. The display characters
(---) change to show the set speed, e.g. 100.
The car symbol is illuminated
on the left-hand side of the
display when the radar sensor
has detected another vehicle.
The distance to vehicles in
front is only regulated when
the symbol is illuminated.
NOTE
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km/h.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 154
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155
Adjusting the set speed In active mode the speed is adjusted with long
or short presses on , or . In active
mode the button has the same function as
but results in a lower increase in speed.
NOTE
If any cruise control button is held depressed for more than approx. one minute, cruise control is disengaged. The engine must be switched off in order to reset cruise control.
In certain situations, cruise control cannot be activated. Cruise control Unavailable is then shown in the display; see page 157.
Set time interval The set time interval to vehicles in front is
increased with and decreased with .
Five different time intervals
can be chosen from and
shown in the display as 15
horizontal lines the more
lines there are the longer the
time interval, see page 159
for table.
At low speed, when the distances are short, the
adaptive cruise control increases the time
interval slightly.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations
in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in
front smoothly and comfortably.
Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short reaction time if any unforeseen
traffic problem should arise.
The number of lines for the
selected time interval is
shown during the setting itself
and for several seconds after-
wards. Then a smaller scale
version of the symbol is
shown to the right of the dis-
play. The same symbol is also shown when
Distance Alert is activated, see page 159.
NOTE
Only use the time interval that is allowed in accordance with local traffic regulations.
If cruise control does not seem to react to activation the reason may be that the time interval to the closest vehicle prevents an increase in speed.
The higher the speed, the longer the calcu- lated distance in metres for a specific time interval.
Deactivating and resuming settings Cruise control is deactivated, either with a
short press on , or by means of driver inter-
vention, e.g. braking. The set speed is then
shown in brackets, e.g. ( 100). Speed and time
interval are resumed with one press on .
For each additional press on , when cruise
control is activated, the set speed increases in
stages of 1 km/h.
NOTE
A significant increase in speed may arise
after the speed has been resumed with .
A short press on in standby mode or a long
press in active mode deactivates cruise con-
trol. The set speed is cleared and cannot be
resumed.
Deactivation due to driver intervention Cruise control is deactivated when the brakes
are used, the gear selector is moved to neutral
position, or if the accelerator pedal is
depressed for a longer period. Cruise control
then changes over to standby mode and the
driver must regulate vehicle speed manually.
If the accelerator pedal is kept depressed for a
shorter period, for example during overtaking,
cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 155
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
then re-engaged when the accelerator pedal is
released.
Automatic deactivation Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other
systems e.g. stability and traction control sys-
tem (DSTC). If any of these systems stop work-
ing then cruise control is automatically deacti-
vated.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal
will sound and the message Cruise control
Cancelled is shown in the display. The driver
must then intervene and adapt the speed to
vehicles in front.
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
speed falls below 30 km/h
wheels lose traction
brake temperature is high
engine speed is too low
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
The radar sensor and its limitations
Apart from the adaptive cruise control, the
radar sensor is also used by the Collision
Warning with Auto Brake function (see
page 167) and the Distance Alert function (see
page 159). It is designed to detect cars or
larger vehicles driving in the same direction.
Modification of the radar sensor could result in
it being illegal to use.
WARNING
Accessories or other objects such as auxil- iary lamps must not be installed in front of the grille.
The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi-
cles in front is reduced significantly:
if the radar sensor becomes blocked and cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy rain or slush, or if other objects have col- lected in front of the radar sensor.
NOTE
Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor clean.
if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi- cantly different from your own speed.
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In
some situations it may detect another vehicle
later than expected or not detect any vehicle at
all.
G 02
14 14
Radar sensor field of vision (grey).
Sometimes the radar sensor cannot detect
vehicles at close quarters, for example a
vehicle that drives in between your car and
vehicles in front.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane
can remain undetected.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 156
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Radar
blocked See manual this means that the
radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked
and that vehicles in front of the car could not
be detected.
In turn this means that the Adaptive Cruise
Control, Distance Alert and Collision Warning
with Auto Brake functions are not operating
either.
The table presents possible causes for a mes-
sage being shown along with the appropriate
action.
Cause Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or
snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig-
nals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy
road surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no
longer blocked.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle.
Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed.
Set time interval, during adjustment.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 157
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol Message Specification
Set time interval, after adjustment.
Turn on DSTC
to enable Cruise
Cruise control cannot be activated until the traction control and stability function (DSTC) has been
activated.
Cruise control
Cancelled
The cruise control has been shut down.
The driver must regulate the speed.
Cruise control
Unavailable
Cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is blocked e.g. by wet snow or rain.
Radar blocked
See manual
Cruise control temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush
has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 156.
Cruise control
Service required
Cruise control not working.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 158
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance Alert
04
159
General
Distance Alert is a function that indicates the
time interval to vehicles in front.
The distance information is only provided for
vehicles driving in front of the car and in the
same direction. No distance information is pro-
vided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-
cles.
G 03
13 94
A small section of the red warning lamp in the
windscreen illuminates with a constant glow
when driving closer than the set time interval to
vehicles in front.
NOTE
Distance Alert is deactivated during the time that Adaptive Cruise Control is active.
Distance Alert is active at speeds above
30 km/h.
WARNING
Distance Alert only shows the distance to vehicles in front the speed of the car is not affected.
Operation
G 03
13 96
Press the button in the centre console to switch
the function on or off. The function is switched
on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
Set time interval The buttons for setting the time interval to vehi-
cles in front are located to the left in the steer-
ing wheel. Time intervals are increased using
and decreased using .
Five different time intervals
can be chosen from and
shown in the display as 15
horizontal lines the more
lines there are the longer the
time interval.
Number of lines Time interval (seconds)
1 1.0
2 1.4
3 1.8
4 2.2
5 2.6
The number of lines for the
selected time interval is
shown during the setting itself
and for several seconds after-
wards. Then a smaller scale
version of the symbol is
shown to the right of the dis-
play. The same symbol is also shown when
adaptive cruise control is activated.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 159
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance Alert
04
160
NOTE
The higher the speed, the longer the dis- tance in metres for a given time interval.
The set time interval is also used by the Adaptive Cruise Control function; see page 153.
Only use time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.
Limitations
The function uses the same radar sensor as
adaptive cruise control and the collision warn-
ing system. For more information on the radar
sensor and its limitations, see page 156.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia- tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sunglasses, could mean that the warning light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could affect the
radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles in
front. The size of other vehicles could also
affect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles.
This could mean that the warning lamp illumi-
nates at a shorter distance than the setting or
that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than
that set due to limitations in sensor range; see
page 156.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Set time interval, during adjustment.
Set time interval, after adjustment.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 160
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance Alert
04
161
Symbol Message Specification
Radar blocked.
See manual
Distance Alert temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush
has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 156
Collision warn.
Service required
Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 161
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
City Safety
04
162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
City Safety is a function for helping the driver
to avoid a collision when driving in queues,
amongst other things, when changes in the
traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in atten-
tion, could lead to an incident.
The function is active at speeds up to 30 km/h
and assists the driver by braking the car auto-
matically.
City Safety is activated in situations where
the driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why is cannot help the driver in every
situation.
City Safety must not be used as an excuse
for the driver to change his/her driving style. If
the driver solely relies on City Safety to do
the braking, there will be a collision sooner or
later.
The driver or passengers normally only notice
City Safety if a situation arises where the car
is extremely close to being in a collision.
If the car is also equipped with a Collision
Warning function with Auto Brake*, these two
systems complement each other. For more
information on Collision Warning function with
Auto Brake, see page 167.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City Safety components may only be per- formed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
City Safety does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road condi- tions.
City Safety does not react to vehicles driving in a different direction from the car, to small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles or to humans and animals.
City Safety can prevent collision at a speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at a higher speed difference, it is only possible to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain full brake function, the driver must depress the brake pedal.
Never wait for City Safety to engage. The driver always bears responsibility for main- taining the proper distance and speed.
Function
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window.
City Safety detects the traffic in front of the
car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of
the windscreen. If there is an immediate risk of
collision, City Safety will automatically brake
the car with approx. 50% of maximum brake
force.
If the speed difference is 15 km/h or less in
relation to the vehicle in front then City
Safety can completely prevent a collision.
If the difference is 15-30 km/h, City Safety
may not prevent the collision on its own. To
obtain full brake force, the driver must depress
the brake pedal. This could make it possible to
prevent a collision even at speed differences
above 15 km/h.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 162
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
City Safety
04
163
When the function is activated and brakes, the
instrument panel display shows a message to
the effect that the function is/has been active.
NOTE
The brake lights come on when City Safety brakes the car.
Operation
NOTE
The City Safety function is always ena- bled after the engine has been started via key position I and II (see page 70 on key positions).
On and Off In certain situations, it may advisable to disable
City Safety, e.g. for driving off-road where
leafy branches could sweep over the bonnet/
windscreen or similar.
G 02
14 09
Display and direction indicator stalk.
Thumbwheel
RESET button
With the engine running City Safety can be
disabled as follows:
1. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to City Safety on the display.
2. Hold the RESET button depressed for 1 second to switch to Off.
However, the function will be enabled the next
time the engine is started, regardless of
whether the system was enabled or disabled
when the engine was switched off.
WARNING
The laser sensor also transmits laser light when City Safety is disabled manually.
To enable City Safety again:
Follow the same procedure as for disa- bling, but select the On option with the RESET button.
or
Switch off the engine and take out the remote control key to position I, then re- insert it to position II and start the engine - by which means City Safety is re- enabled (see page 70 on key positions).
Limitations
cars and other large vehicles in front of the car
irrespective of whether it is day or night.
However, the sensor has limitations and has
poorer functionality in e.g. heavy snowfall or
rain, dense fog, dust storms or snow flurries.
Mist, dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen may
disrupt the function.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
projecting load, or accessories such as auxili-
ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the
bonnet limit the function.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 163
evastarck
City Safety sensor is designed to detect
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
City Safety
04
164
Vehicles with low reflectivity may disrupt the
function of the sensor.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the laser sensor free from ice, snow and dirt (see the illustration for sensor loca- tion, page 162).
Do not affix or mount anything on the windscreen in front of the laser sensor
Remove ice and snow from the bonnet - snow and ice must not exceed a height of 5 cm.
Fault tracing and action If the message Windscreen Sensors
blocked is shown on the instrument panel dis-
play, it indicates that the laser sensor is
blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of
the car. This means that City Safety is not
operational.
The Windscreen Sensors blocked message
is not shown for all situations in which the laser
sensor is blocked. The driver must therefore be
diligent about keeping the windscreen and
area in front of the laser sensor clean.
The following table presents possible causes
for the message being shown, along with sug-
gestions for appropriate action.
Cause Action
The windscreen sur-
face in front of the
laser sensor is dirty
or covered with ice
or snow.
Clean the wind-
screen surface in
front of the sensor
from dirt, ice and
snow.
The laser sensor
field of vision is
blocked.
Remove the block-
ing object.
IMPORTANT
If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips in the windscreen in front of either of the laser sensor's "windows" and they cover a surface of approx. 0.5 3.0 mm (or larger), then an authorised Volvo workshop must be contacted for repair or replacement of the windscreen (see the illustration for sensor location, page 162). Failure to take action may result in reduced performance for City Safety.
To avoid the risk of reducing City
applies:
The same type or a Volvo-approved windscreen must be fitted during replacement
The same type or Volvo-approved windscreen wipers must be fitted during replacement.
Laser sensor
The City Safety function includes a sensor
which transmits laser light. It is absolutely
essential to follow the prescribed instructions
when handling the laser sensor.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 164
evastarck
Safety performance the following also
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
City Safety
04
165
WARNING
Never look into the laser sensor (which emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magni- fying optics such as a magnifying glass, microscope, lens or similar optical instru- ments - this would involve a risk of eye injury (the illustration on page 162 shows sensor location).
For more information on the laser sensor, see
page 8.
Symbols and messages in the display
In conjunction with automatic braking by the
City Safety system, one or more symbols
may illuminate on the instrument panel and a
message may appear on its display.
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the READ button on the direc-
tion indicator stalk.
Symbol Message Meaning/Action
Auto braking by City Safety City Safety is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about the limitations of the laser sensor, see page 163.
City Safety Service
required
City Safety is not operational.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 165
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
City Safety
04
166
Symbol Message Meaning/Action
City Safety ON/OFF City Safety can be manually disabled/enabled, whereby OFF or ON is selected, see section "On/
Off".
City Safety Unavailable If the text Unavailable is shown instead of Off or On, City Safety is switched off due to a technical
fault.
City Safety Service required is shown in the instrument panel display prior to this.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 166
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167
General
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is designed
to assist the driver when there is a risk of col-
liding with a vehicle in front that is stationary or
driving in the same direction.
The collision warning system has the following
three functions.
Collision warning warns the driver of a potentially imminent collision.
Brake support assists the driver to brake effectively in a critical situation.
Auto Brake brakes the car automatically when a collision is unavoidable. The Auto Brake function cannot prevent a collision but instead aims to reduce collision speed.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of collision warning system components must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The collision warning system does not work in all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. The collision warning system does not react to vehicles driving in another direction to the car or to people and animals.
Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision. The Function section and the section after advise about limitations of which the driver should be aware before using Collision Warning with Auto Brake.
The Auto Brake function can only reduce the collision speed. The driver must depress the brake pedal to achieve full brake function.
Never wait for a collision warning. When driving you are responsible for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the collision warning system is used.
Function
G 03
27 40
Functions overview.
Visual warning signal in the event of a col-
lision risk
Radar sensor
Camera sensor
Collision warning Together with a camera sensor, the radar sen-
sor detects stationary vehicles as well as vehi-
cles driving in the same direction in front of the
car. In the event of there being a risk of collision
with such a vehicle your attention is drawn with
a red flashing warning lamp and a warning
sound.
The collision warning system is active from and
including 7 km/h.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 167
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Brake support If the risk of collision still increases after the
collision warning then the brake support is acti-
vated. The brake support prepares the brake
system for rapid braking and the brakes are
applied gently, which may be noticed as a
slight jerk.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
quickly then full brake function is implemented,
even with light pedal force.
Auto Brake If the driver has not yet started an evasive
manoeuvre in this situation and the risk of a
collision is imminent then the Auto Brake func-
tion comes into effect, without the driver need-
ing to touch the brake pedal. Braking then
takes place with limited brake force in order to
reduce collision speed. The driver has to brake
in order to achieve full brake force.
Operation
Settings are made from the centre console dis-
play via a menu system. For information on
how the menu system is used, see page 116.
NOTE
The Auto Brake function is always switched on and cannot be switched off.
On and Off To select whether the collision warning system
should be switched on or off: Under the Car
settings Collision warning settings menu,
select between the options for On or Off. The
setting selected when the engine was switched
off is automatically obtained when the engine
is started.
Activating/deactivating warning signals The warning sound and warning lamp are acti-
vated automatically when the engine is started
if the system is switched on.
The warning sound can be activated/deacti-
vated separately using the options for On or
Off under Car settings Collision warning
settings Warning sound.
Set warning distance The warning distance regulates the distance at
which the visual and acoustic warnings are
deployed. Select one of the options from
Long, Normal or Short under Car settings
Collision warning settings Warning
distance.
The warning distance determines the system's
sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an
earlier warning. First test with Long and if this
setting produces too many warnings, which
could be perceived as irritating in certain sit-
uations, then change to warning distance
Normal.
Only use warning distance Short in excep-
tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be used by the cruise control even if the colli- sion warning system is switched off.
The collision warning system warns the driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but the function cannot shorten driver reaction time.
In order for the collision warning system to be effective, always drive with the Distance Alert set at time interval 4 5. see page 159.
NOTE
Even if the warning distance has been set to Long then in certain situations warnings could be perceived as being late. E.g. in the event of large differences in speed or if vehi- cles in front brake heavily.
Checking settings The settings required can be controlled on the
centre console display. Access via the menu
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 168
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169
for Car settings Collision warning
settings, see page 116.
Limitations
The visual warning signal may be difficult to
notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflec-
tions, when sunglasses are being worn or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead. The warn-
ing sound should therefore always be acti-
vated.
NOTE
The visual warning signal can be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example. If this occurs then the warning sound is activated even if it is deactivated in the menu system.
Warnings may not appear if the dis- tance to the vehicle in front is small or if steering wheel and pedal movements are large, e.g. a very active driving style.
WARNING
Warnings and braking action could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic situation or external influences mean that the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a vehicle in front correctly.
The sensor system has a limited range for stationary or slow vehicles so the system provides less effective warnings or no warn- ings at all at a higher vehicle speed (above 70 km/h) for such vehicles.
Warnings for stationary or slow vehicles could be disengaged due to darkness.
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For
more information on the radar sensor and its
limitations, see page 156.
An absent or late warning could mean that
there is no brake support or it comes late.
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent
or disturbing then the warning distance can be
reduced. This would lead to the system warn-
ing at a later stage, which reduces the total
number of warnings.
Camera sensor limitations The car's camera sensor is used by the three
functions - Collision Warning with Auto Brake,
Driver Alert Control, see page 173 and Lane
Departure Warning, see page 176.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist and dirt.
Do not attach or fit anything to the wind- screen in front of the camera sensor, as this could reduce or prevent the function of one or more camera-dependent systems.
The camera sensors have limitations similar to
the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in dark-
ness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for
example. Under such conditions the functions
of camera-dependent systems could be sig-
nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car-
riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty
road surfaces or unclear lane markings could
also significantly reduce a camera sensor func-
tion. Functions such as scanning the carriage-
way and detecting other vehicles for example.
During very high temperatures the camera is
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes
after the engine is started in order to protect
camera functionality.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 169
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Windscreen
Sensors blocked then this means that the
camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect
vehicles or road markings in front of the car.
In turn this means that the Collision Warning
with Auto Brake, Lane Departure Warning and
Driver Alert Control functions are not operating
with full functionality.
The table presents possible causes for a mes-
sage being shown along with the appropriate
action.
Cause Action
The windscreen sur-
face in front of the
camera is dirty or
covered with ice or
snow.
Clean the wind-
screen surface in
front of the camera
from dirt, ice and
snow.
Thick fog, heavy rain
or snow means that
the camera does not
work sufficiently
well.
No action. At times
the camera does not
work during heavy
rain or snowfall.
Cause Action
The windscreen sur-
face in front of the
camera has been
cleaned but the
message remains.
Wait. It may take
several minutes for
the camera to meas-
ure the visibility.
Dirt has appeared
between the inside
of the windscreen
and the camera.
Contact an author-
ised Volvo work-
shop to have the
windscreen inside
the camera cover
cleaned.
Low-hanging
objects, e.g. flag for
projecting load.
Find another way to
signal the load or
accept reduced
functionality.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 170
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Collis'n warning OFF Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.
Collision warn. Unavailable The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.
Auto braking was acti-
vated
Auto Brake has been active.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 171
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol Message Specification
Radar blocked. See man-
ual
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush
has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 156
Collision warn. Service
required
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 172
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System DAC*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173
Introduction
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist
drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or
who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are
driving on.
The Driver Alert System consists of two differ-
ent functions, which can either be switched on
at the same time or individually:
Driver Alert Control (DAC)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see page 176.
A switched-on function is set in standby mode
and is not activated automatically until speed
exceeds 65 km/h.
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h.
Both functions use a camera which is depend-
ent on the lane having side markings painted
on each side.
WARNING
The Driver Alert System does not work in all situations but is instead only intended to be of supplementary assistance.
The driver always has ultimate responsibility that the car is driven safely.
General information on Driver Alert Control - DAC
G 01
73 32
The function is intended to attract the driver's
attention when he/she starts to drive less con-
sistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or
starts to fall asleep.
A camera detects the side markings painted on
the carriageway and compares the section of
the road with the driver's steering wheel move-
ments. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does
not follow the carriageway evenly.
NOTE
The camera sensor has certain limitations; see page 169.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete-
riorating driving ability and it is primarily
intended for major roads. The function is not
intended for city traffic.
In some cases driving ability is not affected
despite driver fatigue. In which case there may
not be any warning issued for the driver. For
this reason it is always important to stop and
take a break in the event of any signs of driver
fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC
issues a warning, see page 174.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a driving stint. Always plan breaks at regular intervals and ensure that you are fully rested.
Limitation In some cases the system may issue a warning
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
example:
if the driver tests the LDW function.
in strong side winds.
on rutted road surfaces.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 173
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System DAC*
04
174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operation
Some settings are made from the centre con-
sole display and its menu system. For informa-
tion on how the menu system is used, see
page 116.
The current status can be checked on the trip
computer display with the left-hand stalk
switch.
G 01
73 29
Thumbwheel. Turn the rotary control until
the display shows Driver Alert. The sec-
ond row displays the Off, Unavailable or
Level mark options.
READ button. Confirms or clears a warning
in the memory.
Activating Driver Alert Control Using the centre console display with its menu
system, locate Car settings Driver Alert.
Select the On option.
The function is activated when speed
exceeds 65 km/h and it remains
active as long as the speed exceeds
60 km/h. The display shows a level
mark with 1-5 bars, where a low number of bars
indicates inconsistent driving ability. A high
number of bars indicates stable driving.
If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then the
driver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well as
the text message Driver Alert Time for a
break. The warning is repeated after a time if
driving ability does not improve.
WARNING
An alarm should be taken most seriously as a sleepy driver is not usually aware of his/ her condition.
In the event of an alarm or signs of driver fatigue; stop the car in a safe manner as soon as possible and rest.
Studies have shown that it is equally as dan- gerous to drive when tired as it is under the influence of alcohol.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Driver Alert OFF Function not switched on.
Driver Alert Unavailable Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor
is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 174
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System DAC*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175
Symbol Message Specification
Driver Alert The function analyses the driver's driving style.
The number of bars can vary in the range 1-5, where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent
driving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.
Driver Alert Time for a
break
The vehicle has been driven inconsistently; the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
The system is disengaged.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 175
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System - LDW*
04
176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on Lane Departure Warning - LDW
G 03
26 99
The function is intended to reduce the risk for
single-vehicle accidents accidents where, in
certain situations, the vehicle leaves the car-
riageway and is in danger of driving either into
a ditch or into oncoming traffic.
LDW consists of a camera that detects the side
markings painted on the carriageway. The
driver is alerted by an acoustic signal if the
vehicle crosses a side marking.
Operation and function
G 03
20 14
The function is switched on or off by means of
a switch on the centre console. An indicator
lamp in the button illuminates when the func-
tion is switched on.
The trip computer display shows Lane Depart
Warn Unavailable when the function is in
standby mode.
The LDW function is activated automatically
from standby mode after the camera has scan-
ned in the carriageway's side markings and
speed exceeds 65 km/h. The trip computer
display then shows Lane Depart Warn
Available.
If the camera can no longer detect the carria-
geway's side markings or if speed decreases
to below 60 km/h then the function resumes
standby mode and the display shows Lane
Depart Warn Unavailable.
If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand side
marking of the carriageway without due cause
then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal.
No warning is given in the following situations:
Direction indicators activated
The driver has his/her foot on the brake
pedal 1
In the event of the accelerator pedal being
depressed rapidly1
In the event of rapid steering wheel move-
ments1
In the event of a sudden turn so that the car rolls.
The camera sensor also has certain limitations.
For more information, see page 169.
NOTE
The driver is only warned once each time the wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic alarm when there is a line between the car's wheels.
1 A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected, see Personal preferences.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 176
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System - LDW*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Lane departure warning
On/Off
The function is switched on/off.
Shown at switch-on/off.
The text disappears after 5 seconds.
Lane Depart Warn Availa-
ble
The function scans the carriageway's side markings.
Lane Depart Warn Unavail-
able
Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor
is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
The system is disengaged. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 177
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System - LDW*
04
178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Personal preferences
Using the centre console display with its menu
system, locate Car settings Lane
departure warning. Select the option
required, see page 116.
On at start up: This option sets the function in
standby mode each time the car is started.
Otherwise the same value as when the engine
was switched off is obtained.
Increased sensitivity: This option increases
sensitivity, an alarm is triggered earlier and
fewer limitations apply.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 178
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist syst*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179
General1
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
top centre console display indicate the dis-
tance to the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
Rear only
Both front and rear.
WARNING
Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking. The sensors have blind spots where obsta- cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil- dren and animals near the car.
Function
G 03
13 99
The system is automatically engaged when the
car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is
illuminated. If parking assistance is switched
off with the button, the lamp goes out.
The centre console display shows an overview
of the relationship between the car and
detected obstacle.
Marked fields show which of the four sensors
detected an obstacle. The more marked fields
in the same bar, the shorter the distance
between the car and detected obstacle.
The frequency of the signal increases the
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of
or behind the car. Other sound from the audio
system is muted automatically.
Active
Active
Active
1
2
3
Display screens in different situations.
Display in car with only rear sensors.
Obstacle detected by both right-hand sen-
sors.
Display in car with both front and rear sen-
sors. The front right-hand sensor is 30 cm
or closer to a detected obstacle.
Display in car with both front and rear sen-
sors. No obstacle detected in the front or
rear.
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
constant and the marked sensors' bar is fully
filled in, see figure (2). If the detected obstacle
is within the distance for the constant tone both
behind and in front of the car, then the tone
sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
1 Depending on the market, the Parking assistance system may be either Standard, Option or Accessory.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 179
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist syst*
04
180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Rear parking assistance
G 03
14 00
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles behind comes from the rear loud-
speakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
The system must be deactivated when revers-
ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar
or similar. Otherwise they would trigger the
sensors.
NOTE
Rear parking assistance is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used.
Front parking assistance
G 03
14 01
The distance covered to the front of the car is
about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles in front comes from the front loud-
speaker.
Front parking assistance is active at speeds up
to 15 km/h, and also during reversing. The sys-
tem is deactivated at a higher speed. However,
the lamp in the button remains illuminated in
order to indicate that the system is activated
for the next time the driver shall park. When the
speed is below 10 km/h the system is reacti-
vated.
NOTE
Front parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied.
IMPORTANT
When fitting auxiliary lamps: Remember that they must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps could then be detected as obstacles.
Fault indicator
If the information symbol illuminates
with constant glow and the informa-
tion display shows Park assist syst Service
required then parking assistance is disen-
gaged.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig- nals that are caused by external audio sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- quencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 180
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist syst*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181
Cleaning the sensors
G 03
14 02
Sensor location, front.
G 03
14 03
Sensor location, rear.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 181
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Parking camera*
04
182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on PAC
The PAC (Park Assist Camera) displays what is
behind the car when reversing with the help of
a display screen.
Using references lines in the display screen,
the system also indicates where the car will end
up based on steering wheel movement. This
makes it easier to parallel park, reverse into
tight spaces or connect a trailer.
PAC can also be installed on cars equipped
with Volvo genuine GPS navigator RTI* - Road
and Traffic Information System.
WARNING
The parking camera serves as an aid. It does not relieve the driver of responsi- bility when reversing.
The camera has blind spots, where obstacles cannot be detected.
Be aware of people and animals in the vicinity of the car.
Function
G 03
19 30
The driver sees what is behind the car and if
something appears from the sides.
The parking camera is mounted at the opening
handle of the tailgate.
The camera's strong wide-angle lens shows a
wide area behind the car as well as the car's
bumper and towbar.
The system's electronic image processing cor-
rects the "fisheye" effect of the camera image
to display a natural image. As a result, objects
on the screen may appear to be tilted. This is
perfectly normal.
NOTE
Objects on the screen may appear further away than they actually are.
Light conditions The parking camera automatically detects light
conditions and continually adjusts sensitivity.
Because of this, the image may vary slightly in
brightness and quality. In poor light conditions
or darkness, the camera compensates by
increasing light sensitivity, which could reduce
image quality.
If the display screen seems too dark, bright-
ness can be increased with the thumbwheel (1)
for instrument lighting; see page 77.
NOTE
In poor light conditions, it is extremely important that the camera lens is free of dirt, snow and ice.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 182
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Parking camera*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183
Operation
Activation The parking camera is activated when reverse
gear is engaged, if the function is selected in
the menu system, see page 116.
If RTI is active, the PAC system automatically
takes over and the camera image appears on
the display screen instead of navigation sys-
tem information.
Deactivation The parking camera works with a delay. This
means that the image behind the car may be
shown even if reverse gear has been disen-
gaged in order to drive the car forward a little.
After reversing is complete, the camera image
remains for approx. 15 seconds or until speed
exceeds 10 km/h.
The system then resumes whatever mode was
active prior to reverse gear engagement - e.g.
the RTI system is reactivated.
Guide lines
G 00
00 00
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and are
directly related to steering wheel movement,
which shows the driver the path the car will
take, even when turning.
NOTE
When reversing with a trailer, the lines on the screen show the path of the car - not the trailer.
IMPORTANT
Bear in mind that the screen only shows the area behind the car - pay attention to the sides and front of the car when manoeuvring during reversing.
Side lines
G 03
19 29
The side lines indicate the path the car will take
during reversing. They indicate approx. 10 cm
of "free space" between the inside of the line
and the outer tip of the door mirrors - even
when turning.
The side lines extend 2.0 m back from the bumper.
Transverse lines The short transverse lines show the distance
from the bumper and back.
The RED transverse line indicates 0.3 m
The YELLOW transverse line indicates 1.5 m.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 183
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Parking camera*
04
184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cars equipped with Park Assist
G 03
19 31
If the car is also equipped with Park Assist* rear
(see page 179), coloured markings indicate the
distance to the obstacle, e.g. when reversing
into a parking spot.
Marking (colour) Distance to obstacle (m)
Green 0,8-1,5
Yellow 0,3-0,8
Red 00,3
If one of the outer Part Assist
sensors detects an object
closer than 0.4 m,but outside
of the parking camera's field
of vision, a door mirror icon is
shown on the screen.
If this is the case, check the door mirrors for
any obstacles.
Settings To set system activation, press MENU and go
to Main menu Car settings . Select from
the following options:
Parking camera settings
Select Park Assist lines to show side lines when reversing.
Select Distance Bars to show distance
lines when reversing1.
System activation
Select Automatic for PAC to be active during reversing.
Select Off for PAC to be permanently off.
Limitations
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on the rear of the car could obscure the camera's view.
Even if it only looks like a relatively small part
of the image is obscured, it could be a relatively
large sector that is hidden from view. Obsta-
cles could thereby go undetected until they are
very close to the car.
To bear in mind
Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice and snow.
Clean the camera lens regularly with luke- warm water and car shampoo - take care not to scratch the lens.
1 Only if Park Assist is installed.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 184
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185
General information on BLIS
G 03
14 04
BLIS camera
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
BLIS is an information system based on cam-
era technology that under certain conditions
can help the driver to notice vehicles moving in
the same direction as the host vehicle in the so-
called "blind spot".
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS system components must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The system is a supplement to, not a replacement for, a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driver's attention and responsibility. The responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver.
The system is designed to work most effec-
tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane
highways.
When a camera has detected a vehicle
inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp
illuminates with a constant glow.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault
arises in the system. If for example the sys-
tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS
indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown
on the information display. In such cases,
check and clean the lenses.
If necessary, the system can be switched off
temporarily by pressing the BLIS button once,
see page 185.
Blind spots
G 01
78 34
A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3 m
Activating/deactivating
BLIS
G 03
14 06
Button for activating/deactivating.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 185
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
04
186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.
Upon activation, the indicator lamps in the door
panels flash 3 times.
The system can be deactivated/activated
when the engine is started by pressing the
BLIS button.
When BLIS is deactivated, the lamp in the but-
ton goes out and a text message is shown in
the instrument panel display.
When BLIS is activated the light in the button
illuminates, a new text message is shown and
the indicator lamps in the door panels flash
3 times. Press the READ button to clear the
text message. For more information on mes-
sages, see page 118.
When BLIS operates
The system operates when the car is driven at
a speed above 10 km/h.
Overtaking The system is designed to react if:
you overtake another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle
you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h faster than you are travelling.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is revers- ing.
A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre- vent the vehicle in the screened area from being detected by BLIS.
Daylight and darkness In daylight the system reacts to the shape of
the surrounding vehicles. The system is
designed to detect motor vehicles such as
cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.
In darkness the system reacts to the head-
lamps of surrounding vehicles. If the head-
lamps of surrounding vehicles are not switched
on then the system does not detect the vehi-
cles. This means for example that the system
does not react to a trailer without headlamps
which is towed behind a car or truck.
WARNING
The system does not react to cyclists or moped riders.
The BLIS cameras may have problems in conditions with intense light or when driving in the dark with no light sources (e.g. road- way lighting or other vehicles). The system may interpret the lack of lights as a blocked camera or cameras.
In either case, a message appears on the information display.
When driving in such conditions, system performance may be temporarily poorer and a text message is shown; see page 187. If the message disappears automatically, it indicates that BLIS has resumed normal function.
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to those of the human eye, i.e. they do not "see" as well in e.g. heavy snowfall or thick fog.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 186
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187
Cleaning
In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam-
era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be
cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.
Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not
scratched.
IMPORTANT
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice or snow. If necessary, brush snow away from the lenses.
Messages on the display
Message Specification
Blind-spot info
system ON
BLIS system on
Blind spot syst.
Service required
BLIS not function-
ing.
Contact an author-
ised Volvo work-
shop.
Blind spot syst.
Camera blocked
The BLIS camera is
blocked by dirt,
snow or ice. Clean
the lenses.
Message Specification
Blind spot syst.
Reduced function
The BLIS camera is
disrupted by fog or
strong sunlight shin-
ing directly into the
camera.
The camera resets
itself when the envi-
ronment has
returned to normal.
Blind-spot info
system OFF
BLIS system off
Limitations
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may
illuminate despite there being no other vehicle
within the blind spot.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso- lated occasions despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot then this does not mean that a fault has arisen in the system.
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the display shows the text Blind spot syst. Service required.
Here are several examples of situations where
the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if
there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.
Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g. noise barrier or concrete road surface.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 187
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
04
188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 188
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
04
189
Storage spaces
G 03
14 33
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 189
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
04
190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Storage compartment in door panel
Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat
cushions
Ticket clip
Glovebox
Storage compartment, cup holder
Coat hanger
Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat
Storage pocket
Coat hanger The jacket holder is only designed for light
clothing.
Tunnel console
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and
USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
Includes cup holder for driver and passen-
ger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter are
specified then there is a cigarette lighter in
the 12 V socket for the front seat, see
page 191, and a detachable ashtray in the
cup holder.)
Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal
objects in the cup holder as such objects could
accidentally trigger the alarm*, see page 56.
Cigarette lighter and ashtray* The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached
by lifting the tray straight up.
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull
out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
Glovebox
G 02
42 06
The owner's manual and maps can be kept
here for example. There are also holders for
pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can
be locked with the key blade, see page 42.
Floor mats*
Volvo supplies specially manufactured floor
mats.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 190
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191
WARNING
The floor mat at the driver's seat must be firmly fitted and secured in the attachment clips to prevent it from being trapped around and under the pedals.
Vanity mirror
G 02
14 38
Vanity mirror with lighting.
The lamp for the vanity mirror, on the driver's
side* and passenger side respectively, is
switched on automatically when the cover is
raised.
12 V socket
G 03
14 35
12 V socket, front seat.
G 02
14 40
12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
The electrical socket can be used for 12 V
accessories, such as mobile phone chargers
and coolers. The maximum current is 10 A. For
the socket to supply current, the remote con-
trol key must be in at least position I, see
page 70.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.
Electrical socket in cargo area*
G 03
14 36
Fold down the cover to access the electrical
socket. It works irrespective of whether or not
the ignition is switched on.
NOTE
Do not use the electric socket with the engine switched off as there is a risk of the battery becoming discharged.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 191
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
G 02
14 43
System overview.
Mobile phone
Microphone
Steering wheel keypad
Centre console
BluetoothTM
A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM
can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys-
tem. The audio system then works handsfree,
with the option to control a range of the mobile
phone's functions remotely. The mobile phone
can be operated by its own keys irrespective of
whether or not it is connected.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones is fully compatible with the handsfree function. Information on compatible phones is avail- able at Volvo dealers and at www.volvocars.com.
Phone functions, controls overview
G 03
14 56
Centre console control panel.
VOLUME Same functionality available in
steering wheel keypad.
Number and letter buttons
PHONE - On/off and standby mode
Navigation button
EXIT - End/refuse phone calls, clear
entered characters, interrupt current func-
tion. Same functionality available in steer-
ing wheel keypad.
ENTER Accept calls. A press of the but-
ton reveals latest dialled numbers. Same
functionality available in steering wheel
keypad.
Remember
The menus are controlled from the centre con-
sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen-
eral information on menus, see page 116.
Activating/deactivating A short press on PHONE activates the hands-
free function. The text PHONE at the top of the
display shows that it is in phone mode. The
symbol shows that the handsfree func-
tion is active.
One long press on PHONE deactivates the
handsfree function and disconnects a con-
nected phone.
Connect mobile phone A mobile phone is connected in different ways
depending on whether or not it has been con-
nected previously. To connect a mobile phone
for the first time, follow the instructions below:
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 192
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193
Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system
1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible
via BluetoothTM, see mobile phone manual
or www.volvocars.com.
2. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE.
> Menu option Add phone appears on
the display. If one or more mobile
phones have already been registered
then these are also shown.
3. Select Add phone.
> The audio system searches for mobile
phones in the vicinity. The search takes
approximately 30 seconds. The mobile
phones detected are specified with their
respective BluetoothTM name in the dis-
play. The handsfree function's
BluetoothTM name is shown in the
mobile phone such as My Car.
4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the
audio system display.
5. Enter the number series shown in the audio
system display via the mobile phone key-
pad.
Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system
1. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE. If there is a phone connected,
disconnect the connected phone.
2. Search with the phone's BluetoothTM, see
the mobile phone manual.
3. Select My Car in the list of units detected
in your mobile phone.
4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile
phone when prompted for the PIN code.
5. Select to connect to My Car from the
mobile phone.
The mobile phone is registered and connected
automatically to the audio system while the text
Synchronising is shown in the display. For
more information on how mobile phones are
registered, see page 195.
When the connection is established the symbol
is shown and the mobile phone
BluetoothTM name is shown in the display. Now
the mobile phone can be controlled from the
audio system.
To call 1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown
at the top of the display and that the
symbol is visible.
2. Dial the number or use the phone book,
see page 195.
3. Press ENTER.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone Automatic disconnection takes place if the
mobile phone moves out of the audio system's
range. For more information on connection,
see page 195.
Manual disconnection takes place by deacti-
vating the handsfree function with one long
press on PHONE. The handsfree function is
also deactivated when the engine is switched
off or when a door is opened1.
When the mobile phone has been discon-
nected an ongoing call can be continued with
the mobile phone's built-in microphone and
speaker.
1 Only Keyless Drive
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 193
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Some mobile phones require that the changeover from handsfree is confirmed from the phone's keypad.
Making and receiving calls
Incoming call Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the
audio system is in CD or FM mode for example.
Refuse or end with EXIT.
Automatic answer The automatic answer function means that
calls are accepted automatically.
Activate/deactivate under Phone settings
Call options Automatic answer.
In call menu Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call
to access the following functions:
Mute microphone - audio system micro- phone is muted.
Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans- ferred to the mobile phone.
NOTE
With certain mobile phones the connection is terminated when the privacy function is used. This is normal. The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect.
Phone book searching in the phone book.
NOTE
A new call cannot be started during an ongoing call.
Audio settings
Phone call volume The call volume can be regulated when the
handsfree function is in phone mode. Use the
steering wheel keypad or VOLUME.
Audio system volume Providing there is no ongoing call taking place,
the audio system volume is controlled as usual
with VOLUME. In order to control audio system
volume during an ongoing call you have to
switch to one of the audio sources.
The audio source can be automatically muted
for incoming calls under Phone settings
Sounds and volume Mute radio.
Ring volume
Go to Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring volume and adjust with / on the
navigation button.
Ring signals The handsfree function has integrated ring sig-
nals that can be selected under Phone
settings Sounds and volume Ring
signals Ring signal 1, 2, 3 etc.
NOTE
The connected mobile phone's ring signal is not deactivated when one of the handsfree system's integrated signals is used.
In order to select the connected phone's ring
signal2, go to Phone settings Sounds and
volume Ring signals Use mobile
phone signal.
2 Not supported by all mobile phones.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 194
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195
More on registering and connecting
A maximum of five mobile phones can be reg-
istered. Registration is performed once per
phone. After registration the phone no longer
needs to be visible/detectable. A maximum of
one mobile phone can be connected at a time.
Phones can be deregistered under Bluetooth
Remove phone.
Automatic connection When the handsfree function is active and the
last mobile phone connected is in range it is
connected automatically. When the audio sys-
tem searches for the last phone connected its
name is shown in the display. To change over
to manual connection of another phone, press
EXIT.
Manual connection If you want to connect a mobile phone other
than the last connected or change the con-
nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:
1. Set the audio system in phone mode.
2. Press PHONE and select one of the
phones in the list.
The connection can also be made via the menu
system under Bluetooth Connect phone
or Change phone.
Phone book
All use of the phone book presupposes that the
text PHONE is shown at the top of the display
and that the symbol is visible.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book from each registered mobile phone. The
phone book is copied automatically to the
audio system during each connection.
Deactivate the function under Phone
settings Synchronise phone book.
Searching for contacts is only performed in
the connected mobile phone's phone
book.
NOTE
If the mobile phone does not support copy- ing of the phone book then List is empty is shown when copying is finished.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's
contact information then this is shown in the
display.
Searching for contacts The easiest way to search in the phone book is
with long presses on the keys 29. This starts
a search in the phone book based on the key's
first letter.
The phone book can also be reached with /
on the navigation button or with / on
the steering wheel keypad. The search can also
be performed from the phone book's Search
menu under Phone book Search:
1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to
call.
Voice recognition The mobile phone's voice recognition function
for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.
Voice mail number Voice mail number can be changed under
Phone settings Call options Voice mail
number. If there is no number stored then this
menu can be reached with one long press on
1. Press 1 for a long time to use the stored
number.
Call lists The call lists are copied to the handsfree func-
tion at each new connection and are then
updated during the connection. Press ENTER
to show the last dialled. Other call lists are
available under Call register.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 195
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last dialled calls in reverse order.
Inputting text Input text using the keypad in the centre con-
sole. Press once for the key's first character,
twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for
more characters, see the following table.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-
acter. One long press on EXIT clears all input
characters. / on the navigation button
scrolls between the characters.
Key Function
Space .1-? ! , : " ' ( )
A B C 2
D E F 3
G H I 4
J K L 5
M N O 6
Key Function
P Q R S 7
T U V 8
W X Y Z 9
Pressed briefly if two characters
shall be entered after each other
with the same key.
+ 0 @ * # & $ / %
Shift between upper and lower
case letter
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 196
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Built-in phone*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197
General
5
G 03
32 04
System overview.
Microphone
SIM card reader
Keypad, see page 133.
Control panel
Privacy handset
Safety Only entrust phone servicing to an authorised
Volvo workshop. The built-in phone must be
switched off during refuelling or in the vicinity
of blasting work. IDIS limits the menu system
depending on the speed of the car, see
page 199.
Remember
SIM card The phone can only be used with a valid SIM
card (Subscriber Identity Module). For installa-
tion, see page 200. Emergency calls to emer-
gency numbers can be made without a SIM
card.
NOTE
The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM cards. Combined 3G/GSM cards work. Contact the network operator if the SIM card needs to be changed.
Menus and controls The menus are navigated using the control
panel and the steering wheel keypad.
For general information on menus, see
page 116. For information on the phone's con-
trols, see page 192.
On/Off Switch on the phone with a short press on
PHONE. Enter the PIN code if necessary. The
symbol shows that the phone is switched
on. When this symbol is shown calls can be
received even if the CD menu for example is
shown in the display. Briefly press PHONE to
use the phone menus and to dial out. The text
PHONE shows that the phone menu is active.
Switch off the phone with one long press on
PHONE.
Making and receiving calls
Making calls 1. Switch on the phone.
2. If PHONE is not shown in the display,
briefly press PHONE.
3. Dial the number or use the phone book,
see page 192.
4. Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up
the privacy handset. Release the handset
by pulling it down.
Ending a call End a call by pressing EXIT or by hanging up
the privacy handset.
Incoming call Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up the
privacy handset. If the privacy handset is off
the hook when the phone rings then calls must
be received using ENTER.
End calls by pressing EXIT or by hanging up
the privacy handset. Refuse calls using EXIT.
Automatic answer See page 194.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 197
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Built-in phone*
04
198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Call waiting The function enables a new call to be answered
during an ongoing call. The new call is
answered as usual and the previous call is put
on hold.
Activate/deactivate under Phone settings
Call options Call waiting.
Automatic diversions Incoming calls can be diverted automatically
depending on the type of call and situation.
Activate/deactivate under Call options
Diversions.
During a call
Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access
the In-call menu.
To call 1. Put the call on hold under Hold.
2. Dial the number of the third party or use the
Phone book menu option.
Switch between calls using the Swap menu
option.
Conference call A conference call consists of several parties. It
can be initiated when a call is underway and
another is on hold. The Join menu option starts
the conference call.
All ongoing calls are disconnected if the con-
ference call is terminated.
Switching between the privacy handset
and handsfree Switch from handsfree to the privacy handset
by picking up the privacy handset or selecting
Privacy handset in the menu.
Switch from the privacy handset to handsfree
using the Handsfree menu option.
Mute mode Mute mode involves deactivating the micro-
phone, see page 197.
Activate/deactivate the microphone using
the Microphone On/Off menu option.
Audio settings
Phone call volume The phone uses the front door speakers. Call
volume can be controlled when the text
PHONE is shown at the top of the display.
Use the steering wheel keypad or
VOLUME.
Audio system volume See page 135.
Signals and volume Change the ring signal under Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring signals.
Activate/deactivate the message beep under
Phone settings Sounds and volume
Message beep.
Control the ring volume under Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring volume.
Adjust using / on the navigation button.
Phone book
Contact information can be stored on the SIM
card or in the phone.
Storing contacts in the phone book 1. Press MENU and scroll to Phone book
New contact.
2. Enter a name and press ENTER. For infor-
mation on text input, see below.
3. Enter a number and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory and
press ENTER.
Inputting text See page 196.
Searching for contacts See page 195.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 198
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Built-in phone*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199
Erasing contacts Erase a contact in the phone book by selecting
it and pressing ENTER. Then scroll to Erase and press ENTER.
Erase all contacts under Phone book Erase
SIM or Erase phone.
Copying entries between the SIM card
and the phone book
Go to Phone book Copy all SIM to
phone or Phone to SIM and press ENTER.
Voice mail number See page 195.
Other functions and settings
IDIS IDIS (Intelligent Driver Information System)
can, in active driving situations, delay or refuse
ring signals from incoming calls. This way less
attention is distracted from driving.
IDIS is deactivated under Phone settings
IDIS.
Reading messages 1. Scroll to Messages Read and press
ENTER.
2. Scroll to a message and press ENTER.
3. The message text is shown in the display.
Additional selections can be made by
pressing ENTER.
Writing and sending messages 1. Scroll to Messages Write new and
press ENTER.
2. Enter text and press ENTER. For informa-
tion on text input, see page 196.
3. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.
4. Enter a phone number and press ENTER.
Message settings Message settings are not normally changed.
The network provider has further information
on these settings. There are three options
under Messages Message settings:
SMSC number - Specifies the message centre which will transfer the messages.
Validity time - Specifies how long the message will be stored in the message centre.
Message type.
Call lists Lists of received, dialled and missed calls are
stored in Call register. Dialled calls are also
shown by pressing ENTER. The phone num-
bers in the lists can be saved in the phone
book.
Call duration
Call duration is stored under Call register
Call duration.
Reset the values under Call register
Call duration Reset timers.
Show/hide number for third party The phone number can be temporarily hidden
under Call options Send my number.
IMEI number In order to block a phone the network provider
must be advised of the phone's IMEI number.
Dial *#06# to show the number in the dis-
play. Write it down and keep it in a safe
place.
Network selection The network can be selected either automati-
cally or manually under Phone settings
Network selection.
SIM code and security The PIN code can protect the SIM card from
unauthorised use.
The code can be changed under Phone
settings Edit PIN code.
Change the security level under Phone
settings SIM security.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 199
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Built-in phone*
04
200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Select maximum security with the On option.
The code will then need to be entered each
time the phone is switched on.
Select the next highest security level with the
Automatic option. The phone then stores the
code and automatically specifies it when the
phone is switched on. When the SIM card is
used with another phone the code must be
entered manually.
Select minimum security with the Off option.
The SIM card can then be used without the
code at all.
Reset to factory settings The phone settings are fully reset under Phone
settings Reset phone settings.
Installing the SIM card
G 02
14 50
G 02
14 51
Make sure that the phone is deactivated.
Pull out the SIM card holder which is
located in the glovebox.
Place the SIM card with the metal surface
visible and fit the cover on the SIM card
holder . Refit the SIM card holder.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 200
evastarck
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
04
201
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 201
evastarck
202
Recommendations during driving......................................................... 204
Refuelling.............................................................................................. 206
Fuel....................................................................................................... 207
Loading................................................................................................. 210
Cargo area............................................................................................ 211
Warning triangle.................................................................................... 215
Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 216
Towing and recovery............................................................................. 222
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 202
evastarck
05 DURING YOUR JOURNEY
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 203
evastarck
05 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
05
204
General
Economical driving Economical driving and reducing environmen-
tal impact result from driving gently with antic-
ipation and adapting your driving style and
speed to the current situation (for further
advice on how you can reduce environmental
impact, see page 11).
Do not let the engine idle, but drive at light loads as soon as it is possible.
A cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.
Do not drive with unnecessary loads in the car.
Do not use winter tyres when the roads are dry.
Remove the load carrier when it is not in use.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that the engine reaches its normal operat- ing temperature more quickly.
Driving in water The car can be driven through water at a maxi-
mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of
10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling after
driving in water and mud.
Do not let the car stand with water over the sills
for any long period of time. This could cause
electrical malfunctions.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could enter the transmission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of the systems.
In the event of stalling in water, do not try to restart - tow the car out of the water to an authorised Volvo workshop. Risk of engine breakdown.
Engine and cooling system Under special conditions, for example when
driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with
heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and
cooling system will overheat. Proceed as fol-
lows to avoid overheating the engine:
Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a while after the engine has been switched off.
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in extreme high temperatures.
Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm (3500 rpm for diesel engines) if driving with a trailer or caravan in hilly ter- rain. The oil temperature could become too high.
Open tailgate Avoid driving with the tailgate open. If it is how-
ever necessary, only drive for a short distance.
Close all windows, set the air distribution to the
windscreen and floor and run the fan at the
highest speed.
WARNING
Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 204
evastarck
05 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
05
205
Do not overload the battery The electrical functions in the car load the bat-
tery to varying degrees. Avoid using the ignition
position II when the engine is switched off. Use
ignition position I instead, as less power is con-
sumed.
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions
which use a lot of power when the engine is
switched off. Examples of functions that use a
lot of power:
ventilation fan
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume)
parking lamps
If the battery voltage is low, a message appears
on the information display. The energy-saving
function shuts down certain functions or
reduces certain functions such as the ventila-
tion fan and audio system. Charge the battery
by starting the engine.
Before a long journey
Check that the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption is normal.
Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid).
Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
Carrying a warning triangle is a legal requirement in certain countries.
Winter driving Check the following in particular before the
cold season:
The engine coolant must contain at least 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine down to approximately 35 C. To achieve optimum antifreeze protection, different types of glycol must not be mixed.
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation.
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star- ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold. For more information on suitable oils, see page 271.
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather.
The condition of the battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather pla- ces great demands on the battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold.
Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec-
ommends using winter tyres on all four wheels
if there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in certain countries.
Slippery driving conditions Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 205
evastarck
05 During your journey
Refuelling
05
206
Refuelling
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
G 02
14 59
Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the
lighting panel. The filler flap is located on the
right-hand rear wing, as indicated by the sym-
bol's arrow in the information display.
Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until a
click confirms that it is closed.
Opening/closing the fuel cap
WARNING! AVERTISSEMENT!
ACHTUNG!
G 03
13 91
A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in
the event of high outside temperatures. Open
the cap slowly.
After refuelling, refit the cap and turn it until one
or more clicking sounds are heard.
NOTE
If the fuel cap is not properly closed or if the engine is running during refuelling then the symbol for a fault in the exhaust system is illuminated. However, this does not affect the performance of the car.
Filling up with fuel Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.
Opening the fuel filler flap manually
G 02
14 61
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually
when electric opening from the passenger
compartment is not possible.
1. Open the side hatch in the cargo area (same side as fuel filler flap).
2. Locate the green cord with handle.
3. Pull it straight back until the fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 206
evastarck
05 During your journey
Fuel
05
207
General information on fuel
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended
by Volvo must not be used as engine power
and fuel consumption is negatively affected.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel fumes and fuel splashing in the eyes.
If fuel gets into your eyes, take out contact lenses if worn and rinse your eyes with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of the two, as well as diesel, are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.
IMPORTANT
The use of other fuels for each respective engine type, other than recommended here by Volvo, could cause engine damage and impaired performance.
The use of other fuels also invalidates Vol- vo's warranties as well as any supplemen- tary service agreement.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.
Petrol
Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most
engines can be run with octane ratings of 95
and 98 RON. 91 RON should only be used in
exceptional cases.
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 C,
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
IMPORTANT
Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as not to damage the catalytic converter.
In order that Volvo's warranty shall remain valid, never mix alcohol with pet- rol, as the fuel system could be dam- aged.
Do not use additives not recommended by Volvo.
Catalytic converters The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
purify exhaust gases. They are located close to
the engine so that operating temperature is
reached quickly.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho-
dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts,
i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem-
ical reaction without being used up them-
selves.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that con-
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 207
evastarck
05 During your journey
Fuel
05
208
tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel
to air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. These adjustments create optimal
conditions for efficient combustion, and
together with the three-way catalytic converter
reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, car-
bon monoxide and nitrous oxides).
Diesel
Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204
standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to con-
taminants, such as excessively high volumes
of sulphur particles for example. Only use die-
sel fuel from well-known producers. Never use
diesel of dubious quality.
At low temperatures (-6 C to -40 C), a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which
may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel
fuel designed for low temperatures around
freezing point is available from the major oil
companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem-
peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre-
cipitate.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-
gent and water.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard.
The sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels which must not be used:
Special additives
Marine Diesel Fuel
Fuel oil
RME 1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegeta- ble oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
Empty tank No special procedures are required if the tank
runs dry. The fuel system is bled automatically
if the remote control is kept in key position II
(see page 70) for approx. 60 seconds before
the start attempt.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter The fuel filter separates condensation from the
fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-
tion.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel.
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.
Diesel particle filter (DPF) Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
which results in more efficient emission con-
trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are
collected in the filter during normal driving. So-
called "regeneration" is started in order to burn
away the particles and empty the filter. This
requires the engine to have reached normal
operating temperature.
Regeneration of the filter takes place automat-
ically at an interval of approximately
300-900 km depending on driving conditions.
1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 208
evastarck
05 During your journey
Fuel
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209
Regeneration normally takes 10-20 minutes. It
may take a little longer at a low average speed.
Fuel consumption may increase slightly during
regeneration.
Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does
not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approximately
80% full of particles, a warning triangle on the
instrument panel illuminates, and the message
Soot filter full. See manual is shown on the
instrument panel display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating tem-
perature, preferably on a main road or motor-
way. The car should then be driven for
approximately ca 20 minutes more.
When regeneration is complete the warning
text is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that
the engine reaches normal operating tempera-
ture more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up with particles then it can be difficult to start the engine and the filter will be incapable of functioning. Then there is a risk that the filter will have to be replaced.
Fuel consumption and emissions of carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption figures may change if the car
is equipped with extra equipment that affects
the car's weight. Table, see page 275.
The manner in which the car is driven, and
other non-technical factors can also affect fuel
consumption.
Consumption is higher and power output lower
for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 209
evastarck
05 During your journey
Loading
05
210
General
The load capacity is affected by what is moun-
ted on the car, such as a towbar, load carriers
and roof box. The load capacity of the car is
also reduced by the number of passengers and
their weight.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change depending on the weight and distribution of the load.
Loading the cargo area
Position the load firmly against the back- rest in front.
Put wide loads in the centre.
Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible.
Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.
Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- lets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
Always secure the load.
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compro- mised or eliminated by high loads. Never load cargo above the backrest. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy brak- ing the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.
Protect sharp edges with something soft.
Turn off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load and cause a gear to engage and the car to move off.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear
seats of the car can be folded down, see
page 74.
Securing loads
G 03
19 66
Each corner of the cargo area has attachment
points intended for the anchorage of loads.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that are loose or protrude could cause injury during heavy braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 210
evastarck
05 During your journey
Cargo area
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211
Bag holder*
G 01
77 45
Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.
The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and
prevents them from overturning and spreading
their contents across the cargo area.
1. Open the hatch that is part of the floor in
the cargo area.
2. Tension and secure the carrier bags using
the strap.
Safety net*
G 03
42 13
The safety net is fitted into four mounting points.
A safety net prevents loads or pets from being
thrown forward in the passenger compartment
in the event of sudden braking. For safety rea-
sons, the safety net must always be correctly
fastened and secured.
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and
can be secured two different locations in the
car:
Rear fitting - Behind the rear seat backrest
Front fitting - Behind the front seat backr- ests.
WARNING
Loads in the cargo area must be firmly secured, even if the safety net is correctly fitted.
Installation
NOTE
The safety net is most easily fitted via one of the rear doors.
WARNING
Make sure that the upper mountings of the safety net are correctly fitted and that the anchoring straps are securely fastened.
Do not use a damaged net.
1. Unfold the safety net and make sure that
the split upper rod is locked in extended
position.
2. Hook one end of the rod into the front or
rear roof mounting with the anchoring strap
locks turned towards you.
3. Hook the other end of the rod into the roof
mounting on the opposite side - the tele-
scopic spring-loaded retaining hooks facil-
itate alignment.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 211
evastarck
05 During your journey
Cargo area
05
212
- Take care to press forward the rod's
retaining hooks for each respective roof
mounting's front end position.
Rear fitting.
4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear
roof mountings, hook the safety net's
anchoring straps into the front floor eyes in
the cargo area.
Front fitting.
Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front
roof mountings, hook the safety net's
anchoring straps into the eyes on the rear
of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the
backrests are straightened and the seats
are moved forward slightly.
Pay attention to make sure that you do not
press the seat/backrest hard against the
net when the seat/backrest is moved back
again - only adjust until the seat/backrest
makes contact with the net.
IMPORTANT
If the seat/backrest is pressed hard back- wards against the safety net then the net and/or its roof mountings could be dam- aged.
5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring
straps.
Removal and storage
The safety net can be easily removed and folded up.
Release the tension in the net by pressing
in the button on the anchoring strap's lock
and feeding out part of the strap.
Press in the catch and detach both of the
anchoring strap's hooks.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 212
evastarck
05 During your journey
Cargo area
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213
Break the rod in the centre, fold it together
and roll up the net.
The folded safety net can be stored under the
cargo compartment floor.
Safety grille*
G 03
19 78
A safety grille prevents loads or pets from
being thrown forward in the passenger com-
partment in the event of sudden braking. For
safety reasons, the grille must always be
mounted and secured correctly.
Folding up Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and
pull back/up.
IMPORTANT
The safety grille cannot be folded up or down when a cargo cover is fitted.
Installation
G 01
83 67
G 01
83 68
G 01
83 69
NOTE
The safety grille is most easily fitted and removed by two people via the rear doors.
When fitting, the handle, see
illustration , must be on the front of the grille.
The backrests must be lowered to allow the
safety grille to be fitted, see page 74.
Position the handle in fitting position, see
illustration. Press gently on the handle to
enable it to be turned into position, see
arrow.
Press the strut in towards the grille and
align the grille in the roof mounting.
Turn the handle 90 . Press gently as in
the illustration (1) if necessary. Secure the
grille by angling the handle 90 .
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 213
evastarck
05 During your journey
Cargo area
05
214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Removal Removal of the grille takes place in reverse
order to the description in the related section
entitled "Installation".
Cargo cover*
G 03
19 77
Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it
into the holes by the rear pillars in the cargo
area.
IMPORTANT
The safety grille cannot be folded up or down when the cargo cover is fitted.
Fitting the cargo cover Move one end piece of the cover into the
recess on the side panel.
Move the other end piece into the corres-
ponding recess.
Press both sides in. A "click" should be
audible and the red marking should disap-
pear.
> Check that both end pieces are locked.
Removing the cargo cover 1. Press in one end piece button and lift it out.
2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the
other end piece loosens automatically.
Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing
disc In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear
sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the
cargo area when it is fitted.
Pull the sealing disc back gently, free from
its support shelves, and lower.
Long load
The passenger seat backrest can also be
folded for an extra long load, see page 72.
Roof load
Using load carriers To avoid damaging the car and for maximum
possible safety while driving, the load carriers
designed by Volvo are recommended.
Carefully follow the installation instructions
supplied with the carriers.
Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.
Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load.
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- racteristics are altered by roof loads.
For information on maximum permitted roof load, including load carriers and any space box, see page 269.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 214
evastarck
05 During your journey
Warning triangle
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215
Lift the floor mat and take out the warning
triangle.
Take the warning triangle from the case,
fold out and assemble the two loose sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
Follow the regulations in force for the use of a
warning triangle*. Position the warning triangle
in a suitable place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
First aid
A case with first aid equipment is located under
the floor in the cargo area
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 215
evastarck
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
216
General
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then
the car is delivered with the necessary equip-
ment for driving with a trailer.
The car's towing bracket must be of an approved type.
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket complies with the specified maximum towball load.
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load. For tyre pressure label location, see page 261.
Clean the towing bracket regularly and grease the towball.
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.
The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.
The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.
If the car is driven with a heavy load in a hot climate, the engine may overheat. If the temperature in the engine's cooling system is too high the warning symbol is illumi-
nated and the information display shows High engine temp Stop safely. Stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes and cool down. If High engine temp Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop engine are shown then the engine must be switched off after stopping the car.
The automatic gearbox has a built-in pro- tection system that engages in the event of overheating. If the temperature in the gear- box is too high the warning symbol is illu- minated and the information display shows Transmission hot Reduce speed or Transmission hot Stop safely. Follow the instructions and reduce speed or stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes to enable the gearbox to cool down. In the event of overheating the car's air condi- tioning may be temporarily switched off.
In the interests of safety, you should restrict speed to 80 km/h, even if the laws of certain countries allow for higher speeds.
Move the gear selector to position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake. Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Trailer cable An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has
7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved
by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag
on the ground.
Direction indicators on trailer A symbol in the combined instrument panel
flashes when the direction indicators are used
and the trailer is connected. If the symbol
flashes more quickly then one of the lamps on
the car or the trailer is broken, see page 67.
Automatic gearbox
Parking on a hill 1. Activate the parking brake.
2. Move the gear selector to position P.
Starting on a hill 1. Move the gear selector to position D.
2. Release the parking brake.
Steep inclines
Do not use a higher manual gear than the engine can "handle". It is not always eco- nomical to drive in high gears.
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 15%.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 216
evastarck
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
217
Level control The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant
height irrespective of the car's load (up to the
maximum permissible weight). When the car is
stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal.
Trailer weights National vehicle regulations can limit trailer
weights and speeds. The towbar can be certi-
fied for a higher towing weight than the car can
actually tow. For Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see page 270.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.
Towing equipment
If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,
the towball mounting instructions must be fol-
lowed carefully, see page 218.
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:
Follow the assembly instructions for the towball section carefully.
The towball section must be locked with the key before setting off.
Check that the indicator window shows green.
Important checks
The towball section's towball must be cleaned and greased regularly.
NOTE
If a towball hitch with vibration damper is used, it is not necessary to grease the tow- ball.
Storing the towball section
G 03
17 13
Towball section storage location.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towball section after use and store it in the appointed location in the car, firmly fastened with its strap.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 217
evastarck
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
218
Specifications
G 02
14 85
B
A G 03
19 73
F
H
EG
C D
G 03
19 74
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
A 1013
B 69
C 855
D 428
E 109
F 296
G Side member
H Ball centre
Installing the towball
G 01
89 28
Remove the protective cover by first press-
ing in the catch and then pulling the
cover straight back .
G 02
14 87
Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clock-
wise.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 218
evastarck
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
219
G 02
14 88
The indicator window must show red.
G 02
14 89
Insert the towball section until you hear a
click.
G 02
14 90
The indicator window must show green.
G 00
00 00
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-
tion. Remove the key from the lock.
G 02
14 94
Check that the towball section is secure by
pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towball section is not fitted correctly then it must be removed and refitted in accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towball section should be clean and dry.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 219
evastarck
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
220
G 02
14 95
Safety cable.
WARNING
Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to the correct place.
Removing the towball
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
Push in the locking wheel and turn it
anticlockwise until you hear a click.
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towball rearward and
upward.
WARNING
Secure the towbar's loose towball safely if it is stored in the car, see page 217.
G 01
89 29
Push the protective cover until it snaps
tight.
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA
The TSA system (Trailer Stability Assist) serves
to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it
begins to snake.
The TSA function is part of the DSTC system
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), see
page 150.
Function The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Normally, snaking
occurs at extremely high speeds. But, there is
a risk of it occurring at lower speeds
(70-90 km/h) if the trailer is overloaded or the
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 220
evastarck
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
221
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind.
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole.
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
Operation If snaking has started, it could be difficult or
even impossible to suppress. This makes the
car/trailer combination difficult to control and
there is a risk that you could, for example, end
up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
The TSA system continually monitors car
movements, particularly lateral movements. If
snaking is detected, the front wheels are indi-
vidually braked. This serves to stabilise the car/
trailer combination. This is often enough to
help the driver regain control of the car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the
TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer
combination is braked with all wheels and
engine power is reduced. Once snaking has
been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer
combination is once again stable, the TSA sys-
tem stops regulating and the driver once again
has full control of the car.
Miscellaneous The TSA system can engage within the speed
interval 60 to 160 km/h.
NOTE
If the driver chooses to deactivate (reduce) the DSTC system, the TSA system is also deactivated, see page 150.
TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severe
steering wheel movements to try to rectify the
snaking because in such a situation the TSA
system cannot determine whether it is the
trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking.
The DSTC symbol in the combined
instrument panel flashes when the
TSA is working.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 221
evastarck
05 During your journey
Towing and recovery
05
222
Towing
Find out the highest legal speed for towing
before towing the car.
1. Press the remote control key into the igni-
tion switch to unlock the steering lock so
that the car can be steered, see page 70.
2. The remote control key must remain in the
ignition switch while the car is being towed.
3. Ensure the towrope is always taut by gently
depressing the brake pedal to avoid violent
jerks.
4. Be prepared to brake to stop.
WARNING
Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch to unlock the steering lock (so that the car can be steered) before towing.
WARNING
The steering lock stays in the position it was in when the power was cut off. The steering lock must be unlocked before towing. The ignition must be in position II. Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off. The brake pedal must be pressed about five times harder than normal, and the steering will be considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox Move gear lever into neutral and release
the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.
Cars with automatic gearbox must not be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or further than 80 km.
Jump starting Do not tow the car to bump start it. Use a donor
battery if the battery is discharged to the extent
that the engine does not start, see page 97.
IMPORTANT
Bump starting the car can damage the cat- alytic converter.
Towing eye
Use the towing eye if the car needs to be towed
on the road. The towing eye is fastened in the
socket on the right-hand side of the bumper.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and put it
back in its storage space.
Fitting the towing eye
Take out the towing eye from its storage
space under the floor hatch in the cargo
area.
> In some cases, the towing eye may be
hidden under the sill.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 222
evastarck
05 During your journey
Towing and recovery
05
223
G 03
19 71
Use a slotted screwdriver or a coin to
detach the cover at its bottom edge.
Screw in the towing eye firmly, right in up
to the flange. Use the wheel wrench to
tighten the towing eye.
NOTE
On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting. In which case, secure the tow rope in the towbar.
For this reason it is advisable to store a detachable towbar towball in the car.
Recovery
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.
An all-wheel drive car (AWD) with raised front suspension must not be towed at speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be towed further than 50 km.
WARNING
The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for recovering the car. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 223
evastarck
G 02
09 22
224
Engine compartment............................................................................. 226
Lamps................................................................................................... 231
Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 238
Battery................................................................................................... 240
Fuses..................................................................................................... 243
Wheels and tyres................................................................................... 251
Car care................................................................................................. 263
Type designations................................................................................. 267
Specifications........................................................................................ 269
Type approval....................................................................................... 276
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 224
evastarck
06 MAINTENANCE AND SPECIF ICATIONS
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 225
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Engine compartment
06
226
General
Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-
ble, follow the Volvo service programme as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Have an authorised Volvo workshop carry out
service and maintenance work. Volvo work-
shops have the personnel, special tools and
service literature to guarantee the highest qual-
ity of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Check regularly Check the following oils and fluids at regular
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
Coolant
Engine oil
Power steering fluid
Washer fluid
WARNING
Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start automatically some time after the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
Opening and closing the bonnet
G 03
19 10
G 03
19 11
Pull the handle by the pedals. An informa-
tion symbol lights when the bonnet is open,
see page 66.
Move the catch to the left and open the
bonnet. (The catch hook is located
between the headlamp and grille, see illus-
tration.)
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.
Engine compartment, overview
The appearance of the engine compartment may vary depending on engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Power steering fluid reservoir
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 226
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Engine compartment
06
227
Engine oil dipstick
Radiator
Filler opening for engine oil
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand
drive)
Battery
Relay and fuse box, engine compartment
Filling washer fluid
Air filter.
WARNING
High voltage output from the ignition sys- tem. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dangerous. The ignition switch must therefore always be in position 0 during work in the engine compartment; see page 70.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils when the ignition is in ignition position II or when the engine is hot.
Checking the engine oil
G 02
17 33
Label for oil grade.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products. If the
car is driven in adverse conditions, see Volvo's
recommendations, see page 271.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting cha- racteristics, fuel consumption and environ- mental impact. Volvo Car Corporation dis- claims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low
oil level or low oil pressure. Certain variants
have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp
for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an
oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed
via the warning symbol in the centre of the
instrument unit as well as by display texts. Cer-
tain models have both variants. Contact a
Volvo dealer for more information.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 227
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Engine compartment
06
228
Filling and dipstick
G 03
19 14
Petrol engine.
G 03
19 15
Diesel engine.
Change in accordance with the intervals speci-
fied in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
IMPORTANT
When filling oil to top up, the oil being filled must have the same grade, see page 273.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially
important before the first scheduled oil change.
The most accurate measurements are made on
a cold engine before starting. The measure-
ment will be inaccurate if taken immediately
after the engine is switched off. The dipstick
will indicate that the level is too low because
the oil has not had time to flow down into the
oil sump.
G 02
17 37
The oil level must be within the area marked on the dipstick.
Park the car on a level surface, switch off the
engine and wait 10-15 minutes to allow the oil
time to run back to the sump. For capacities,
see page 271 and onwards.
Checking with a cold engine 1. Wipe the dipstick clean.
2. Check the level using the dipstick. It must
be between the MIN and MAX marks.
3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start
by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up
until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN
on the dipstick.
IMPORTANT
Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con- sumption may increase if too much oil is poured into the engine.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
Checking with a warm engine 1. Wipe the dipstick clean.
2. Check the oil level using the dipstick.
3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start
by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up
until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN
on the dipstick.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 228
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Engine compartment
06
229
Coolant
Checking and topping up the coolant
G 03
19 18
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather con-
ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk
of freezing increases with both too little and too
much coolant concentrate. For capacities, see
page 273.
IMPORTANT
A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.
Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water, see page 273. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations.
When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing system components, flush the cool- ing system clean with approved quality tap water, or flush with ready-mixed coolant, see page 273.
The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. High tempera- tures can occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks) to the cylinder head.
Check the coolant regularly The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could
occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.
Brake and clutch fluid
Checking the level Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-
voir. The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir.
Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade,
see page 273. The fluid should be changed
annually on cars driven in conditions requiring
hard, frequent braking, such as driving in
mountains or tropical climates with high
humidity.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. The rea- son for the loss of brake fluid must be inves- tigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 229
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Engine compartment
06
230
Filling
The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.
The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover
over the cold section in the engine compart-
ment. The round cover must be removed first
before the reservoir cap can be reached.
1. Turn and open the cover located on the
covering.
2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.
The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks, which are located on the
inside of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Remember to close the cap.
Power steering fluid
G 03
19 21
IMPORTANT
Keep the area around the power steering fluid reservoir clean when checking.
Check the level frequently. The most accurate
measurements are made on a cold engine
before starting. The fluid does not require
changing. The fluid level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks. For capacities and rec-
ommended fluid grade, see page 273.
NOTE
If a fault should arise in the power steering system or if the engine is switched off and the car must be towed, it can still be steered.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 230
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Lamps
06
231
General
All bulbs are specified, see page 237. Bulbs
and spotlights that are of a special type or that
are only suitable for replacement by a work-
shop are:
General interior lighting in the roof, reading lamps
Glovebox lighting
Direction indicators, door mirror
Direction indicators, rear
Approach light duration
Position lamp
Active Xenon lamps
LED lamps
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, Xenon lamp replacement must be carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop. The headlamps must be handled with extreme caution due to the Xenon lamp's high-voltage unit.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oils from your fin- gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.
Front lamp housing
G 03
19 35
G 03
19 36
All front bulbs (except those for fog lamps) are
replaced by first removing the whole lamp
housing from the engine compartment.
WARNING
Always switch off the ignition and remove the remote control key before starting to replace a bulb.
Removing the headlamp 1. Press quickly on the START-/STOP button
and remove the remote control key.
2. (Upper illustration)
Withdraw the lamp housing's locking
pins.
Pull the lamp housing straight forward.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con- nector
3. (Lower illustration)
Detach the lamp housing connector by
pressing down the clip with your thumb.
At the same time, guide out the con-
nector with your other hand.
4. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a
soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.
5. Replace the bulb in question.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 231
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Lamps
06
232
Installing the headlamp
G 03
23 56
When installing, check that the long lock pin is
engaged - it should be engaged in both eyes.
1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound
should be heard.
2. Reinstall the lamp housing and locking
pins. Check that they are correctly
inserted.
3. Check the lighting.
The lamp housing must be plugged in and
installed before the lighting is switched on or
the remote control key is inserted into the igni-
tion switch.
Removing the cover
G 03
22 50
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 231.
1. Release the catches by pressing out.
2. Remove the cover by pulling it straight out.
Reinstall the cover in reverse order.
Dipped beam, halogen
G 03
22 51
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder
downwards.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it
in. It can only be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 232
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Lamps
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 233
Main beam, Halogen
G 03
22 52
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Detach the bulb holder by pulling it straight
out.
5. Replace the bulb and fit the new one in the
socket. It can only be secured in one posi-
tion.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Extra main beam, Xenon*
G 03
22 53
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Detach the bulb holder by pulling it straight
out.
5. Replace the bulb and fit the new one in the
socket. It can only be secured in one posi-
tion.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Direction indicators/flashers
G 03
23 58
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti-
clockwise.
3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the
bulb.
4. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
and turning anticlockwise.
5. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clock-
wise.
6. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 233
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Lamps
06
234
Side marker lamps
G 03
23 57
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 231.
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise and
remove it.
3. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.
It can only be installed in one way.
4. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and turn
clockwise.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Front fog lamps
G 03
19 37
Undo the cover by pulling out the top corner,
closest to the grille, see the illustration above.
1. Pull the cover straight out in the direction
of the centre of the car using a tool, see the
illustration above.
2. Unscrew the lamp housing screw and
remove the fog lamp.
3. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it.
4. Fit a new bulb and turn clockwise.
5. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the
bulb holder must always be upward.
Rear fog lamp
G 03
23 59
The rear fog lamp is accessed behind the
bumper
1. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti-
clockwise.
2. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
and turning anticlockwise.
3. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clock-
wise.
4. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 234
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Lamps
06
235
Location of rear bulbs
G 03
19 39
Lamp lens, right-hand side
Position (LED)/side marker lamps
Side reflector, rear
Brake light
Reversing lamp
Indicator
Brake light (LED)
Brake lights and reversing lamps
G 03
24 85
Both the brake light and the reversing lamp
bulbs are replaced from inside the cargo area.
1. Open the panel.
2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti-
clockwise.
3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
and turning anticlockwise.
4. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clock-
wise.
5. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.
Number plate lighting
G 03
19 40
1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
2. Carefully detach the entire lamp housing
and withdraw it.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Refit the entire lamp housing and screw it
into place.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 235
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Lamps
06
236
Courtesy lighting
G 03
19 41
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 231.
1. Insert a screwdriver at the short end of the
lens closest to the tunnel console and turn
gently so that the lens comes loose.
(Applies to both lamps).
2. Turn carefully until the lens comes loose.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Refit the lens.
Lighting, cargo area
G 03
19 42
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so
that the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
back the lamp housing.
Vanity mirror lighting
Removing the mirror glass
G 03
19 43
1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower
edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the
lug on the edge.
2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge
on the left and right-hand sides (by the
black rubber sections), and prize carefully
so that the glass comes loose in the lower
edge.
3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire
mirror glass and cover.
4. Replace the bulb.
Fitting the mirror glass 1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir-
ror glass back into position.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 236
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Lamps
06
237
2. Then press the three lower lugs back into
position.
Specification, bulbs
Lighting Out- put (W)
Type
Extra main beam,
Xenon, ABL
65 H9
Dipped beam, hal-
ogen
55 H7 LL
Main beam, Halo-
gen
65 H9
Front direction
indicators
21 PY21W
Front fog lamps 35 H8
Courtesy lighting,
cargo area lighting,
number plate light-
ing
5 Tubular
lamp
SV8.5
Vanity mirror 1.2 Tubular
lamp
SV5.5
Lighting Out- put (W)
Type
Front side marker
lamps
5 W3WLL
Glovebox lighting 5 Tubular
lamp
SV8.5
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 237
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wiper blades and washer fluid
06
238
Wiper blades
For more information on wipers and washing,
see page 86.
Service position The wiper blades must be in service position to
facilitate replacement or washing.
1. Turn the remote control key to position 0,
see page 70, and keep the remote control
key in the ignition switch.
2. Move the right-hand stalk switch up for
about 1 second. The wipers then move to
standing straight up.
The wipers return to the starting position when
the car is started.
Replacing the wiper blades
G 02
17 60
G 02
17 61
G 02
17 62
Turn up the wiper arm. Press the button
located on the wiper blade mounting and
pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"
is heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
G 02
17 63
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than the blade on the passenger side.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 238
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wiper blades and washer fluid
06
239
Replacing the wiper blades, rear window
G 03
27 70
1. Pull the wiper arm straight out.
2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the
arrow).
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
position against the wiper arm as a lever to
detach the blade more easily.
4. Press the new wiper blade into position.
Check that it is firmly installed.
5. Lower the wiper arm.
Cleaning For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
page 263.
IMPORTANT
Check the wiper blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the serv- ice life of the wiper blades.
Filling washer fluid
G 03
19 27
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Add washer antifreeze during the winter so that the fluid does not freeze in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
For capacities, see page 273.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 239
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Battery
06
240
Warning symbols on the battery
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the
owner's manual.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
The battery contains cor-
rosive acid.
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Risk of explosion.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally responsible manner - it contains lead.
Operation
Check that the cables to the battery are correctly connected and properly tight- ened.
Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running.
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-
ditions, climatic conditions etc.
IMPORTANT
Never use a quick charger to charge the battery.
WARNING
Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode. The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If sul- phuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical attention immediately.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 240
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Battery
06
241
Changing
Removal
G 02
17 68
G 02
17 69
Switch off the ignition and wait for 5 minutes.
Open the clips on the front cover and
remove the cover.
Release the rubber moulding so that the
rear cover is free.
Remove the rear cover by screwing one
quarter turn and lifting it away.
WARNING
Connect and disconnect the positive and negative cables in the correct sequence.
Detach the black negative cable
Detach the red positive cable
Detach the ventilation hose from the bat-
tery
Loosen the screw holding the battery
clamp.
Move the battery to the side and lift it up.
Installation
G 02
17 71
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 241
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Battery
06
242
2. Move the battery inward and to the side
until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
3. Screw in the battery with the screw in the
clamp.
4. Connect the ventilation hose.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).
8. Reinstall the rubber moulding. (See
Removal).
9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with
the clips. (See Removal).
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 242
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
06
243
General
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to pro-
tect the car's electrical system from damage by
short circuiting or overloading.
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault
in the circuit. In which case, contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop to have the system
checked.
Changing 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi- cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.
Location, fuse boxes
G 03
19 25
Location of fuse boxes, left-hand drive.
If the car is right-hand drive, the fuse box
changes , to under the side of the glovebox.
Under the glovebox
Engine compartment
Cargo area
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 243
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
06
244
Engine compartment
G 02
56 00
G 03
19 26
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 244
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245
General fuses, engine compartment On the inside of the cover are tweezers that
facilitate the removal and fitting of fuses.
Positions (see preceding illustration) Engine compartment, upper
Engine compartment, front
Engine compartment, lower
These fuses are all located in the engine com-
partment box. Fuses in are located under
.
Fuses 1 7 and 42 44 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and must only be replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop.
8 15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type and must only be replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop.
16 33 and 35 41 are of the "MiniFuse" type.
Pos Function A
Primary fuse CEM KL30A 50
Primary fuse CEM KL30B 50
Primary fuse RJBA KL30 60
Primary fuse RJBB KL30 60
Pos Function A
Primary fuse RJBD KL30 50
- -
PTC Air preheater* 100
- -
Windscreen wipers 30
Parking heater* 25
Ventilation fan 40
- -
ABS pump 40
ABS valves 20
- -
Headlamp levelling*,
(Active Bi-Xenon*
10
Primary fuse CEM 20
Radar, ACC control mod-
ule*
5
Pos Function A
Speed related power
steering
5
Engine Control Module
(ECM), transm. SRS
10
Heated washer nozzles 10
- -
Lighting panel 5
Headlamp washers 15
12 V socket, front and rear
seat
15
Sunroof*, Roof console/
ECC*
5
Relay, engine compart-
ment box
5
Auxiliary lamps* 20
Horn 15
Engine Control Module
(ECM)
10
Control module, auto-
matic gearbox*
15
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 245
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
06
246
Pos Function A
Compressor A/C 15
Relay coils 5
Starter motor relay 30
Ignition coils 20
Glow system (5-cyl. die-
sel)
10
Engine control module,
Throttle petrol
10
Engine control module,
Throttle diesel
15
Injection system, Mass air
flow sensor
15
Engine valves 10
EVAP, Lambda-sond,
Injection (petrol)
15
Lambda sond (diesel) 10
Diesel filter heater, crank-
case ventilation heater
(diesel)
15
- -
Pos Function A
Glow plugs (diesel) 70
- -
Cooling fan 80
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 246
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247
Under the glovebox
10 11 12 13 141 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
232221201918171615 24 25 26 27 28
G 03
29 18
1. Fold aside the interior trim covering the
fuse box.
2. Press the cover's lock and fold it up.
3. The fuses are accessible.
Positions
Pos Function A
Rain sensor* 5
SRS system 10
ABS brakes 5
Pos Function A
Accelerator pedal*, air
heater (PTC)*, heated seats
7,5
- -
ICM display, CD & Radio,
RSE system*
15
Steering wheel module 7,5
- -
Main beam 15
Pos Function A
Sunroof* 20
Reversing lamps 7,5
- -
Fog lamp, front* 15
Windscreen washers 15
Adaptive cruise control,
ACC*
10
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 247
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
06
248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Pos Function A
- -
Roof lighting, control panel
driver's door/Power pas-
senger seat*
7,5
Information display 5
Power driver's seat* 5
Windscreen wiper, rear 15
Remote control key
receiver, alarm sensors
5
Fuel pump 20
Electric steering lock 20
- -
Lock, tank/tailgate 10
Alarm siren, ECC 5
Start/stop button 5
Brake light switch 5
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 248
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249
Cargo area
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery
on the left-hand side.
Positions
Pos Module (black).
Function
A
Control panel, driver's door 25
Control panel, passenger
door
25
Control panel, rear door, left 25
Pos Module (black).
Function
A
Control panel, rear door,
right
25
- -
12 V socket, cargo area 15
Rear window defroster 30
- -
Trailer socket 2* 15
Pos Module (black).
Function
A
Power seat driver's side* 25
Trailer socket 1* 40
POT (automatic tailgate
opening)*
30
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 249
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
06
250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Pos Module (white).
Function
A
Parking assistance, Parking
camera*
5
Control module Four C* 15
Seat heating, driver's side
front*
15
Seat heating, passenger side
front*
15
Seat heating right rear* 15
AWD control module 10
Seat heating left rear* 15
- -
Power seat passenger side* 25
Keyless drive* 20
Electric parking brake, left 30
Electric parking brake, right 30
Pos Module (blue). Func-
tion
A
Display RTI* 10
- -
Bass speaker* 25
DAB radio 5
Audio amplifier* 25
Audio system 15
Phone, Bluetooth* 5
- - -
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 250
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tyres
06
251
General
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte-
ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pres-
sure and speed rating are important for how the
car performs.
Direction of rotation
G 02
17 78
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed
to only turn in one direction have the direction
of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must
always rotate in the same direction throughout
its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched
between front and rear positions, never
between left and right-hand sides, or vice
versa. If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the
car's braking characteristics and capacity to
force rain and slush out of the way are
adversely affected.
NOTE
Ensure that tyres of the same type and dimensions, and also the same make, are fitted to all four wheels.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified in the tyre pressure table, see
page 262.
Tyre care
Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem
undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even
if they are hardly ever or never used. The func-
tion can therefore be affected. This also applies
to spare tyres, winter tyres and tyres saved for
future use. Examples of external signs which
indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are
cracks or discoloration.
New tyres
G 02
18 23
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.
For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as
possible when you replace them. This is espe-
cially important with regard to winter tyres. The
week and year of manufacture, the tyre's DOT
marking (Department of Transportation), are
stated with four digits, for example 1502. The
tyre in the illustration was manufactured in
week 15 of 2002.
Summer and winter tyres When summer and winter wheels are changed
the wheels should be marked with which side
of the car they were mounted on, for example
L for left and R for right.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 251
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tyres
06
252
Wear and maintenance The correct tyre pressure results in more even
wear, see page 262. Driving style, tyre pres-
sure, climate and road condition affect how
quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-
ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear
patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can
be switched with each other. A suitable dis-
tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10 000 km intervals. Contact an
authorised Volvo workshop if you are uncertain
about tread depth.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging
up - and not standing up.
WARNING
A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control of the car.
Tyres with tread wear indicators
G 02
18 29
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear
Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down
to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height
with the tread wear indicators. Change to new
tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor
grip in rain and snow.
Rims and wheel bolts
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the nuts and the bolts.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso-
ries. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
Locking wheel bolts Locking wheel bolts can be used on both alu-
minium and steel rims.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent
on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres,
the correct tyres must be fitted to all four
wheels.
NOTE
Ask a Volvo dealer which rim and tyre types are most suitable.
Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into
the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 252
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tyres
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253
Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-
peratures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo there-
fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres
that have a tread depth of less than 4 millime-
tres.
Using snow chains
IMPORTANT
Only single-sided snow chains are permit- ted. Use Volvo genuine snow chains or sim- ilar that are properly suited to the car model, tyre size and wheel rim size. Consult an authorised Volvo workshop.
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space
between the brake discs and the wheels is too
small.
Tyre pressure monitoring, TPMS*
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)
warns the driver when the pressure is too low
in one or more of the car's tyres. It uses sensors
located inside the air valve in each wheel.
When the car is driven at about 40 km/h the
system detects the tyre pressure. If the pres-
sure is too low then a warning lamp on the
instrument panel illuminates and a message is
shown on the display.
Always check the system after changing a
wheel in order to ensure that replacement
wheels work with the system.
For information on correct tyre pressure, see
page 262.
The system does not replace normal tyre main-
tenance.
IMPORTANT
If a fault should arise in the tyre pressure system a warning lamp on the instrument panel will illuminate. The message TYRE PRESS. SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will be shown. This can be for various reasons, e.g. fitting a wheel not equipped with a sen- sor adapted for Volvo's tyre pressure moni- toring system.
Adjusting tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure monitoring can be adjusted in
order to follow Volvo's tyre pressure recom-
mendations, when driving with a heavy load for
example.
NOTE
The engine must not be running.
The settings are made with the control in the
centre console. see page 116
1. Inflate the tyres to the required pressure
and select ignition position I or II.
2. Select Car settings Tyre pressure
3. Select Tyre pressure Calibration.
4. Press ENTER.
5. Drive the car at least at 40 km/h in total for
at least 1 minute.
Rectifying low tyre pressure When the message Tire pressure low is
shown on the display
1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres.
The tyres should be cold, see page 262.
2. Inflate the tyre(s) to the correct pressure.
3. Drive the car at least at 40 km/h in total for
at least 1 minute and check that the mes-
sage disappears.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 253
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tyres
06
254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Deactivating/activating tyre pressure
monitoring
NOTE
The engine must not be running.
Settings are made in the controls in the centre
console, see page 116
1. Select ignition position I or II.
2. Select Car settings Tyre pressure
3. Select Tyre press. syst and press
ENTER.
> A X is shown in the display if the system
is activated, the option disappears if the
system is deactivated.
Recommendations Only factory fitted wheels are equipped with
TPMS sensors in the valves.
The temporary spare wheel does not have this sensor.
If wheels without TPMS sensors are used then Tyre press. syst Service required will be shown every time the car is driven faster than 40 km/h for more than 10 minutes.
Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors are fitted to all wheels on the car.
Volvo recommends that sensors are not moved between different wheels.
WARNING
When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS, hold the nozzle of the pump directly against the valve to avoid damaging the valve.
Driveable punctured tyres*
If Self Supporting run flat Tyres (SST) have
been selected then the car is also equipped
with TPMS.
This type of tyre has a specially reinforced side
wall that makes continued driving possible
despite the tyre losing some air. These tyres
are fitted on a special rim. (Normal tyres can
also be fitted to this rim).
If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the yel-
low TPMS lamp on the instrument panel illu-
minates and a message is shown in the text
panel. If this occurs, reduce speed to
max. 80 km/h.
Drive carefully. In order to establish which tyre
needs attention, check the tyre pressure on all
four tyres. The tyre should be checked as soon
as possible.
WARNING
SST tyres should only be fitted by individu- als with expertise on SST tyres.
SST tyres must only be fitted together with TPMS.
After a fault message on low tyre pressure has been shown, do not drive faster than 80 km/h.
Maximum driving distance to tyre change is 80 km.
Avoid hard driving.
SST tyres must be replaced if they are dam- aged or punctured.
Tools
G 03
19 00
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 254
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tyres
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255
A foam block, located in the cargo area, con-
tains all tools. The tools consist of a towing eye,
jack* and wheel wrench*. The foam block is
screwed into a bracket in the bottom of the
spare wheel well.
Jack* The original jack should only be used for
changing wheels. The jack's thread must
always be well greased.
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for temporary use. Replace the spare
wheel with a normal wheel as soon as possible.
The car's handling may be altered by the use
of the spare wheel. The correct tyre pressure
for the spare wheel is stated on the tyre pres-
sure table, see page 262.
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare wheel on the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must never be driven fitted with more than one temporary spare wheel.
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
well with the outside down. Two foam blocks,
one under the spare wheel and one over/inside
affix the spare wheel in position. The upper one
contains all tools.
The same bolt runs through to secure the spare
wheel and the foam blocks.
Taking out the spare wheel 1. Raise the floor hatch and floor mat, from
the back and forward.
2. Undo the retaining screw.
3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.
4. Lift out the spare wheel.
The lower block does not need to be lifted out.
Tools - returning into place
G 02
93 36
The tools and jack must be returned to their
correct places after use. The jack must be
cranked to the correct position in order to have
space.
The foam block and spare wheel must be
replaced in the reverse order to taking out.
Note that there is an arrow on the upper foam
block. It must point forwards in the car.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.
Changing wheels
Removing Set up the warning triangle, see page 215 if a
wheel must be replaced at a busy location. The
car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal sur-
face.
1. Apply the parking brake and engage first
gear, or position P if the car has an auto-
matic gearbox.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 255
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tyres
06
256
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.
NOTE
Use the jack belonging to the car.
2. Take out the spare wheel, jack, wheel
wrench and wrench for the lockable wheel
bolts.
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground.
Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
G 02
17 79
4. Loosen the wheel nuts 1 turn anticlock-
wise with the wheel wrench. G
03 19
01
WARNING
Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack- ing point and the jack.
5. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car. There is a recess in the plastic
cover at each point. Crank the foot of the
jack down so it is pressed squarely on the
ground.
6. Check that the jack sits in the anchorage
as illustrated and that the foot is positioned
vertically under the anchorage.
G 03
21 49
IMPORTANT
The jack mounting point is the rearmost of the two rear recesses.
7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
Installation 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel
and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Screw in the wheel bolts
so that there is no space between the
wheel and brake disc.
3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannot
rotate and remove the jack
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 256
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tyres
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257
G 02
17 80
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tight-
ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check
the torque with a torque wrench.
5. Fit the hub cap (for cars with steel wheel
rims).
NOTE
The hubcap outlet for the valve must be located over the valve on the rim when fit- ted.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.
Park the car so that passengers have the car - or preferably a crash barrier - between them and the road.
Emergency puncture repair*
G 03
24 68
General The emergency puncture repair kit is used to
seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust
the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as
a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle
must be replaced before its expiration date and
after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-
tured in the tread.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in
the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency
puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,
cracks or similar damage.
12 V sockets for the compressor are located by
the centre console in the front, by the rear seat
and in the cargo area. Choose the electrical
socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.
Taking out the emergency puncture
repair kit Set up the warning triangle adjacent to a traf-
ficked location. The emergency puncture
repair kit is located in the foam block under the
floor in the cargo area.
1. Raise the floor hatch and floor mat, from
the back and forward.
2. Unscrew the retaining screw.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 257
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tyres
06
258
3. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.
Replace the parts after use.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. The temporarily sealed tyre must be changed as soon as possible (maximum driving distance: 200 km).
Overview
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
Sealing punctured tyres
G 01
43 38
For information on the function of the parts, see preceding illustration.
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture
repair kit.
2. Detach the label for maximum permitted
speed and affix it to the steering wheel.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 258
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tyres
06
259
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.
3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle seal. The seal is bro- ken when the bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contact an authorised tyre centre.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30seconds.
8. Flick the switch to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contact an authorised tyre centre.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is
3.5 bar.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit
the valve cap.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately
3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Rechecking the repair and pressure 1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 259
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tyres
06
260
label. Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
3. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.
4. Return the emergency puncture repair kit
to the cargo area.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be replaced after use. Replacement must be performed by an authorised Volvo work- shop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Drive to the nearest authorised Volvo work-
shop for the replacement/repair of the dam-
aged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre
contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Contact an authorised Volvo work- shop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maxi- mum driving distance is 200 km).
Inflating the tyres The car's original tyres can be inflated by the
compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in danger to life. Never leave the engine run- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- ficient ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V
sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch
to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure label, (release air using
the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-
sure is too high.)
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Replacing the sealing fluid canister Replace the bottle when the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-
mentally hazardous waste.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 260
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tyres
06
261
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
NOTE
Leave the container at a collection point for storing dangerous waste.
Specifications
Designation of dimensions The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example of designation:
235/60 R18 94 W.
235 Section width (mm)
60 Ratio between section height and
width (%)
R Radial ply
18 Rim diameter in inches (")
94 Tyre load index
W Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed (in this case 270 km/h).
Speed ratings The car is approved as a whole, which means
that dimensions and speed ratings must not
differ from those specified on the car's regis-
tration document.1
The only exception to these conditions is win-
ter tyres (both those with metal studs and those
without). If such a tyre is chosen, the car must
not be driven faster than the speed rating of the
tyre. (For example, class Q can be driven at a
maximum of 160 km/h).
Traffic regulations determine how fast a car
can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.
Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
Y 300 km/h
NOTE
It is the maximum permitted speed that is stated in the table.
Tyre pressure
G 02
18 30
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar (between front and rear door) shows
which pressures the tyres should have at dif-
ferent loads and speed conditions, this is also
specified in the tyre pressure table, see below.
1 There may be deviations in certain markets.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 261
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tyres
06
262
Tyre pressure for the car's recommended wheel dimension
ECO pressure
Spare wheel pressure (Temporary Spare) NOTE
Temperature differences change tyre pres- sure.
Recommended tyre pressure
Variant Tyre size Speed (km/h)
Load, 1 3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA
Front (kPa)B Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) Front/rear (kPa)
All engines 235/65 R 17
235/60 R 18
235/55 R 19
0 160 240 240 270 270 270
160 + 240 240 270 270 -
Spare wheelC T 125/80 R 17 max. 80 420 420 420 420 -
A Economical driving. B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. C Temporary spare.
Fuel economy, ECO pressure At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre
pressure for full load is recommended in order
to obtain optimum fuel economy.
Checking the tyre pressure The tyre pressures must be checked every
month. This also applies to the car's spare
wheel. After several few kilometres of driving,
the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.
Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Cold
tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-
ture as the ambient temperature.
Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con-
sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs
the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre
pressure that is too low could result in the tyres
overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres-
sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and
steering characteristics.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 262
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Car care
06
263
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.
Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator.
Use car shampoo.
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings con- tain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discoloration.
Hose down the underbody.
Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. Do not rinse directly onto the locks.
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.
Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces.
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when it has been switched on for a time.
Cleaning the wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,
impair the service life of wiper blades.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
way of washing the car, but it cannot reach
everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom-
mended for achieving optimum results.
NOTE
During the first few months a new car must only be handwashed. This is because the paintwork is more sensitive when it is new.
High-pressure washing When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the
surface of the car (the distance applies to all
exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the
locks.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per- formance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
The heat from the friction causes the brake lin-
ings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing
after starting in very damp or cold weather.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 263
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Car care
06
264 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for cleaning coloured
plastic parts, rubber and trim components,
such as glossy trim mouldings. When using
such a cleaning agent the instructions must be
followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rub- ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec- essary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.
Rims Only use cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo. Strong rim cleaning agents can damage
the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated
aluminium rims.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is
at least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax
the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using Volvo tar remover or white
spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed
using fine rubbing paste designed for car paint-
work.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-
uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the
packaging carefully. Many preparations con-
tain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Paint treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty.
Cleaning front side windows that have a water-repellent surface*
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on glass surfa-
ces as this could ruin their water-repellent
properties.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage
the glass surface.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.
There is natural wear of the water-repellent
coating.
Treatment with a special finishing agent avail-
able from Volvo dealers is recommended in
order to maintain the water-repellent proper-
ties. This should be used first after three years
and then each year.
Rustproofing inspection and maintenance
The car received a thorough and complete
rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body
are made of galvanised sheet metal. The
underbody is protected by a wear-resistant
anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating
rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
exposed members, cavities, closed sections
and side doors.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 264
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Car care
06
265
Under normal conditions the rustproofing does
not require treatment for approximately 12
years. After this period, it should be treated at
three-year intervals. Please contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop if the car needs further
treatment.
Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is
important to keep the car clean. The car's rust-
proofing needs to be checked regularly and
touched-up if necessary in order for it to be
maintained.
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-
ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.
Stains on fabric upholstery and roof
upholstery A special fabric cleaning agent, available from
authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to
avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of
the upholstery. Use water and a synthetic
detergent to clean the seatbelts. Make sure the
seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery Volvo leather upholstery is chromium-free and
approved in accordance with the Oeko-Tex
100 standard.
The leather is refined and processed so that it
retains its natural characteristics. It is given a
protective coating, but regular cleaning is
required in order to maintain both characteris-
tics and appearance. Volvo offers a compre-
hensive product for the cleaning and treatment
of leather upholstery which, when used in
accordance with the instructions, preserves
the leather's protective coating. After a period
of use the natural appearance of the leather will
nevertheless emerge, depending more or less
on the surface texture of the leather. This is a
natural maturing of the leather and shows that
it is a natural product.
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and application of the protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if
required). Ask a Volvo dealer about Volvo's
Leather care product.
IMPORTANT
Never use strong solvents. Such products may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Note that materials with colour that runs when dry (new jeans, suede garments etc.) may discolour the upholstery material.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery 1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery 1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved pro-
tection against stains and improved UV pro-
tection.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 265
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Car care
06
266
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly
moistened with water, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers. A special cleaning agent avail-
able from Volvo dealers can be used for more
difficult cleaning.
Carpets and cargo area Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a
vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Touching up paintwork
Paint is an important part of the car's rust-
proofing and should therefore be checked reg-
ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged
paintwork should be rectified immediately. The
most common types of paintwork damage are
stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings and doors.
Materials
primer in a can
paint in a can or touch-up pen
brush
masking tape
Colour code
It is important that the exact correct colour is
used. The product decal specifies the car's
colour code, see page 267.
Repairing stone chips
G 02
18 32
Before work is begun, the car must be clean
and dry and at a temperature above 15 C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a
brush once the primer is dry.
3. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect
the undamaged paintwork.
4. After a few days, polish the touched-up
areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount
of lapping paste.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare metal and there is an undamaged col- our coat, you can paint straight after clean- ing the damaged surface.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 266
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Type designations
06
267
Decal location
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 267
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Type designations
06
268
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facili-
tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer
regarding the car and when ordering spare
parts and accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
approval number.
Label for parking heater.
Engine type designation, component and
serial number.
The engine oil decal specifies oil grade and
viscosity.
Gearbox type designation and serial num-
ber.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle
Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 268
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Specifications
06
269
Dimensions
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2774
B Length 4628
C Load length, floor, folded
rear seat 1789
D Load length, floor 972
E Height 1713
F Load height 802
G Front track 1632
Dimensions mm
H Rear track 1586
I Load width, floor 1090
J Width 1891
K Width including door mir-
rors 2142
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids. The weight of passen-
gers and accessories, such as a towbar, load
carriers, space box etc. and towball load (when
a trailer is hitched, see table) influences the
payload and must not be included in the kerb
weight. Permitted weight (in addition to driver)
= Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 269
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Specifications
06
270
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.
G 01
77 55
For information on label location, see page 226.
Gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 100 kg.
Towing capacity and towball load
Model Transmission Trailer weight with brake (kg)
Towball load (kg) Trailer weight with- out brake (kg)
Towball load (kg)
All All 01200 50 max. 750 50
T6 Automatic (TF80SC) AWD 2000 90 max. 750 50
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 270
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Specifications
06
271
Model Transmission Trailer weight with brake (kg)
Towball load (kg) Trailer weight with- out brake (kg)
Towball load (kg)
D5 Automatic AWD 2000 90 max. 750 50
D5 Manual AWD 1800 75 max. 750 50
2.4D Automatic AWD 2000 90 max. 750 50
2.4D Manual AWD 1600 75 max. 750 50
NOTE
The use of stabilising devices is recom- mended with trailers heavier than 1800 kg.
Engine specifications
Model Engine Output (kW/ rpm)
Output (hp/ rpm)
Torque (Nm/ rpm)
No. of cylin- ders
Bore (mm) Stroke (mm) Swept vol- ume
(litres)
Compres- sion ratio
T6 B6304T2 210/5600 285/5600 400/15004800 6 82 93.2 2,953 9.3:1
D5 D5244T4 136/4000 185/4000 400/2000 2750 5 81 93.1 2.400 17,3:1
2.4D D5244T5 120/4000 163/4000 340/17502750 5 81 93.1 2.400 17,3:1
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 271
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Specifications
06
272
Engine oil
Adverse driving conditions Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-
mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 C or hot- ter than +40 C
shorter driving distances (shorter than 10 km) at low temperatures (under 5 C).
This can produce abnormally high oil tempera-
ture or oil consumption.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting cha- racteristics, fuel consumption and environ- mental impact. Volvo Car Corporation dis- claims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
G 02
18 34
Viscosity chart
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 272
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Specifications
06
273
Oil label
Engine variant Volume between MIN and MAX (litres)
Volume (litres)
G 03
20 78
When the label shown here is fitted in the car's
engine compartment then the following applies.
For information on label location, see
page 226.
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 0W30
T6 B6304T2 1.2 7.4
D5
2.4D
D5244T4
D5244T5
1.5 6.0
Other fluids and lubricants
Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade
Transmission oil Manual (M66) 2.0 Transmission fluid: MTF 97309
Transmission oil Automatic (TF-80SC) 7.0 Transmission fluid: JWS 3309
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 273
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Specifications
06
274
Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade
Coolant Petrol engine T6 8.9
Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with
waterA, see packaging. Diesel engine D5
Diesel engine 2.4D
12,65
Air conditioning - Oil: PAG
Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a)B
Brake fluid 0.6 DOT 4+
Power steering 1.2 Power steering fluid WSS M2C204-A2 or
equivalent product.
Washer fluid Cars with headlamp washing
Cars without headlamp washing
6.5
4,5
Use a washer antifreeze recommended by
Volvo, mixed with water.
A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1. B Refrigerant quantity varies depending on engine variant. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information.
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gear- box oil does not need to be replaced during the car's service life. However, this may be necessary under adverse driving condi- tions, see page 272.
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 274
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Specifications
06
275
Consumption, emissions and volume
Model Engine Transmission Consumption (litre/100 km)
Emissions of car- bon dioxide(CO2,
g/km)
Tank volume (litres)
T6 B6304T2 Automatic (TF80SC)
AWD
11.9 284 approx. 70
D5 D5244T4 Manual (M66) AWD 7.5 199 approx. 70
D5 D5244T4 Automatic (TF80SC)
AWD
8.3 219 approx. 70
2.4D D5244T5 Manual (M66) AWD 7.5 199 approx. 70
2.4D D5244T5 Automatic (TF80SC)
AWD
8.3 219 approx. 70
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide Official fuel consumption figures are based on
a standard driving cycle in accordance with EU
Directive 80/1268comb.
The manner in which the car is driven, and
other non-technical factors affect fuel con-
sumption. For more information, see page 11.
Electrical system
12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter-
nator. Single pole system in which the chassis
and engine block are used as conductors. The
negative terminal is connected to the chassis.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, replace it with a battery of the same cold start capacity and reserve capacity as the original (see the decal on the battery).
Performance, battery Voltage (V) Cold start capacity (A) Reserve capacity (min)
T6 12 520-700 100-135
D5, 2.4D 12 700-800 135-160
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 275
evastarck
06 Maintenance and specifications
Type approval
06
276
Remote control system
Country
A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK,
E, EST, F, FIN, GB,
GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT,
LV, M, NL, P, PL, S,
SK, SLO
Delphi hereby
certifies that this
remote control sys-
tem conforms to the
essential character-
istic requirements
and other relevant
regulations of direc-
tive 1999/5/EC.
IS, LI, N, CH
HR
ROK Delphi 2003-07-15,
Germany R-
LPD1-03-0151
BR
RC
CCAB06LP1940T4
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 276
evastarck
07 Alphabetical Index
07
277
A
ACC Adaptive cruise control................. 153
Active chassis FOUR-C........................ 151
Active Xenon Lights................................... 78
Adapting driving characteristics.............. 151
Adaptive cruise control............................ 153
fault tracing......................................... 157
radar sensor........................................ 156
Adaptive cruise control fault tracing........ 157
Additional heater...................................... 132
Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 132
Adjusting headlamp pattern...................... 82
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 83
halogen headlamp................................ 83
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 76
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 22
deactivating/activating......................... 22
driver's and front passenger side......... 20
Air conditioning........................................ 125
general................................................ 121
Air conditioning, AC................................. 125
Air distribution.................................. 122, 127
Air vents................................................... 123
Alarm.......................................................... 56
alarm indicator...................................... 56
alarm signals......................................... 57
arming................................................... 56
checking the alarm............................... 44
deactivating.......................................... 56
deactivating a triggered alarm.............. 56
reduced alarm level.............................. 57
temporary disarming of the alarm........ 57
testing the alarm system...................... 58
Allergy and asthma inducing sub-
stances.................................................... 122
All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 102
All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 102
Approach light, duration............................ 82
Audio
headphones socket............................ 134
rear control panel................................ 134
settings............................................... 135
surround............................................. 133
Audio system........................................... 133
functions............................................. 135
overview.............................................. 133
Audio volume
phone.................................................. 194
phone/media player............................ 194
ring signal, phone............................... 194
AUTO
climate control settings...................... 125
Automatic car washes............................. 263
Automatic gearbox.................................... 98
manual gear positions (Geartronic)....... 99
towing and recovery........................... 222
Automatic locking...................................... 50
Automatic relocking................................... 50
AUX.......................................................... 133
AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 102
B
Backrest..................................................... 72
front seat, lowering............................... 72
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 74
Battery..................................................... 240
maintenance....................................... 240
remote control key/PCC....................... 47
start assistance..................................... 97
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 277
evastarck
07 Alphabetical Index
07
278
symbols on the battery....................... 240
warning symbols................................. 240
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 185
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS...... 185
Bluetooth
handsfree............................................ 192
mute microphone............................... 194
transfer call to mobile......................... 194
Bonnet, opening...................................... 226
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 229
Brake light.................................................. 79
Brakes...................................................... 103
anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 103
brake light............................................. 79
brake system...................................... 103
electric parking brake......................... 107
emergency brake assistance, EBA..... 103
emergency brake light, EBL................. 79
filling brake fluid.................................. 230
symbols in the combined instrument
panel................................................... 103
Built-in phone.......................................... 197
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 231
C
Calls
functions during a call................ 197, 198
incoming..................................... 193, 197
operation..................................... 193, 197
volume in phone................................. 198
waiting................................................ 198
Call waiting.............................................. 198
Camera sensor................................ 163, 169
Car care................................................... 263
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 265
Cargo area
cargo cover......................................... 214
81
mounting points.................................. 210
safety grille.......................................... 213
safety net............................................ 211
Cargo cover............................................. 214
Car upholstery......................................... 265
Car wash.................................................. 263
Catalytic converter................................... 207
recovery.............................................. 222
Centre console......................................... 116
Chassis settings....................................... 151
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 229
Children..................................................... 32
child safety locks.................................. 37
child seats and side airbags................. 24
location in the car................................. 32
safety.................................................... 32
Child safety locks...................................... 55
Child seat................................................... 32
Child seats................................................. 32
integrated two-stage booster cushion. 35
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 37
recommended...................................... 33
size classes for child seats with the ISO-
FIX fixture system................................. 37
upper mounting points for child seats.. 39
Cigarette lighter socket............................ 190
front seat............................................. 191
rear seat.............................................. 191
City Safety............................................ 162
Cleaning
automatic car washes......................... 263
car wash............................................. 263
rims..................................................... 264
seatbelts............................................. 265
upholstery........................................... 265
Clean Zone Interior.................................. 122
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 278
evastarck
lighting.................................................
07 Alphabetical Index
07
279
Climate control........................................ 121
general................................................ 121
sensors............................................... 121
Clock, setting............................................. 69
Collision..................................................... 31
Collision warning..................................... 167
Collision warning system
radar sensor........................ 156, 162, 167
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*......... 167
Colour code, paint................................... 266
Combined instrument panel.................... 118
Comfort inside the passenger compart-
ment......................................................... 189
Compass.................................................. 149
calibration........................................... 149
setting the zone.................................. 149
Condensation in headlamps.................... 263
Controls
centre console.................................... 116
Crash, see Collision................................... 31
Cruise control.......................................... 152
Curtain
panorama roof...................................... 93
D
DAB, menu structure............................... 145
DAB Radio............................................... 143
Deadlocks.................................................. 53
deactivation.......................................... 53
temporary deactivation......................... 53
Defroster.................................................. 125
Diesel....................................................... 208
Diesel particle filter.................................. 208
Direction indicators.................................... 80
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 101
Display lighting.......................................... 77
Distance Alert.......................................... 159
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 133
Door mirrors............................................... 90
Driveable punctured tyres........................ 254
Driver Alert Control.................................. 173
Driver Alert System.................................. 173
Driving...................................................... 204
cooling system.................................... 204
with the tailgate open......................... 204
with trailer........................................... 216
Driving in water........................................ 204
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 269
towing capacity.................................. 269
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 150
E
ECC, electronic climate control............... 124
Economical driving.................................. 204
ECO pressure.......................................... 261
Electrical socket
cargo area........................................... 191
front seat............................................. 191
rear seat.............................................. 191
Electric parking brake.............................. 107
low battery voltage............................. 107
releasing automatically....................... 108
releasing manually.............................. 108
Emergency calls....................................... 197
Emergency equipment
warning triangle.................................. 215
Emergency puncture repair..................... 257
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 209
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 279
evastarck
07 Alphabetical Index
07
280
Engine
overheating......................................... 216
starting.................................................. 95
Engine block heater
fuel-driven........................................... 129
Engine braking, automatic....................... 105
Engine compartment
coolant................................................ 229
oil........................................................ 228
overview.............................................. 226
power steering fluid............................ 230
Engine oil......................................... 227, 272
adverse driving conditions.................. 272
capacities........................................... 272
filter..................................................... 228
oil grade.............................................. 272
Error messages
Driver Alert Control............................. 174
Lane Departure Warning..................... 177
see Messages and symbols............... 157
Error messages in BLIS........................... 187
Error messages in Distance Alert............ 160
Error messages in the Adaptive cruise con-
trol............................................................ 157
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17
External dimensions................................ 269
F
Fan........................................................... 124
Fault tracing for the camera sensor. 164, 170
Floor mats................................................ 190
FM, menu structure................................. 143
Fog lamp
front...................................................... 79
Fog lamps
rear........................................................ 79
Fog lamps, on/off....................................... 79
Foot brake................................................ 103
FOUR-C Active chassis........................ 151
Fuel.......................................................... 207
fuel consumption................................ 209
fuel economy.............................. 261, 262
fuel filter.............................................. 208
Fuse box.................................................. 243
glovebox............................................. 247
Fuses....................................................... 243
box in cargo area................................ 249
changing............................................. 243
general................................................ 243
relay/fuse box in engine compart-
ment.................................................... 244
Fuse table
fuses in cargo area............................. 249
fuses in engine compartment............. 245
G
Gearbox..................................................... 98
automatic.............................................. 98
manual.................................................. 98
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 100
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen-
gagement................................................. 101
Geartronic.................................................. 99
Glass
laminated/reinforced............................. 89
Global opening........................................ 121
Glovebox.................................................. 190
locking.................................................. 50
Gross vehicle weight............................... 269
H
Hazard warning flashers............................ 80
HBS Heart Beat Sensor.......................... 45
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 280
evastarck
07 Alphabetical Index
07
281
HDC......................................................... 105
Headlamp levelling.................................... 77
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 77
Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 82
Headlamps............................................... 231
Headphones socket................................. 134
Head restraint
centre seat, rear.................................... 74
lowering................................................ 74
Heated washer nozzles.............................. 87
Heating.................................................... 125
rearview and door mirrors.................... 91
rear window.......................................... 91
seats................................................... 124
High engine temperature......................... 216
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 87
Hill Descent Control................................. 105
HomeLink EU........................................ 110
Home safe lighting..................................... 82
Hoot........................................................... 76
Horn........................................................... 76
I
IAQS Interior Air Quality System........... 122
IC Inflatable Curtain................................ 26
IDIS Intelligent Driver Information Sys-
tem........................................................... 199
Ignition keys............................................... 70
IMEI number............................................ 199
Immobiliser................................................ 42
Indicator lamps, PCC................................. 44
Information and warning symbols............. 66
Information button, PCC............................ 44
Information displays.................................. 65
Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 77
Instrument overview
left-hand drive....................................... 62
right-hand drive.................................... 64
Instruments and controls........................... 62
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 80
Interior rearview mirror............................... 92
automatic dimming............................... 92
Intermittent wiping..................................... 86
iPod , connection................................... 137
J
Jack......................................................... 255
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 269
Key............................................................. 42
Key blade................................................... 45
Keyless drive........................................ 48, 95
Keyless start (keyless drive)................. 48, 95
Keylock.................................................... 100
Keypad in the steering
wheel.................................. 76, 116, 152, 197
Key positions............................................. 70
L
Laminated glass......................................... 89
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 231
Lane Departure Control........................... 176
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 265
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 281
evastarck
07 Alphabetical Index
07
282
Lighting.................................................... 231
Active Xenon Lights, ABL..................... 78
approach light, duration....................... 82
automatic lighting, passenger compart-
ment...................................................... 81
bulbs, specifications........................... 237
controls................................................. 80
display lighting...................................... 77
front fog lamps..................................... 79
headlamp levelling................................ 77
home safe lighting................................ 82
in passenger compartment................... 80
instrument lighting................................ 77
main/dipped beam............................... 77
position/parking lamps......................... 78
rear fog lamp........................................ 79
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 231
cargo area........................................... 236
courtesy lighting................................. 236
dipped beam halogen......................... 232
direction indicators............................. 233
fog lamp.............................................. 234
main beam, Active Xenon lamps........ 233
main beam halogen............................ 233
number plate lighting.......................... 235
side marker lamps.............................. 234
vanity mirror........................................ 236
Light switches............................................ 77
Loading
cargo area........................................... 210
general................................................ 210
mounting points.................................. 210
roof load............................................. 214
Locking/unlocking
inside.................................................... 50
tailgate............................................ 43, 51
Locks
automatic locking................................. 50
locking.................................................. 50
unlocking.............................................. 50
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 77
Maintenance
rustproofing........................................ 264
Making calls..................................... 193, 197
Manual gearbox......................................... 98
towing and recovery........................... 222
Manual gear positions (Geartronic)............ 99
Memory function in seats.......................... 73
Menus and messages.............................. 116
Menu structure
DAB.................................................... 145
FM....................................................... 143
Messages and symbols
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 165, 171
Distance Alert..................................... 160
Driver Alert Control............................. 174
Lane Departure Warning..................... 177
Messages and symbols in the Adaptive
cruise control........................................... 157
Messages in BLIS.................................... 187
Messages in the combined instrument
panel........................................................ 119
Messages in the information display....... 150
Meters in the combined instrument panel
fuel gauge............................................. 66
speedometer......................................... 66
tachometer........................................... 66
Misting..................................................... 125
attending to the windows................... 121
condensation in headlamps............... 263
remove with the air vents................... 127
timer function...................................... 126
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 282
evastarck
07 Alphabetical Index
07
283
Mobile phone
connect............................................... 195
handsfree............................................ 192
register phone..................................... 192
MY KEY.................................................... 134
O
Oil, see also Engine oil............................. 272
Oil level low.............................................. 228
Overheating............................................. 216
P
PACOS....................................................... 22
PACOS, switch.......................................... 22
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 266
damage and touch-up........................ 266
Panel lighting............................................. 77
Panic function............................................ 43
Panorama roof
curtain................................................... 93
opening and closing............................. 93
ventilation position................................ 94
Parking assistance................................... 179
parking assistance sensors................ 181
Parking brake........................................... 107
Parking heater.......................................... 129
battery and fuel................................... 129
parking on a hill.................................. 129
time setting......................................... 131
Particle filter............................................. 208
Passenger compartment......................... 189
Passenger compartment filter................. 122
Passenger compartment heater
fuel-driven........................................... 129
PCC Personal Car Communicator
functions............................................... 43
range............................................... 44, 45
Petrol grade............................................. 207
Phone
built-in, overview................................ 197
connect............................................... 195
handsfree............................................ 192
incoming calls..................................... 193
making calls........................................ 193
messages........................................... 199
on/off.................................................. 197
phone book......................................... 195
phone book, shortcut......................... 195
receiving a call.................................... 194
register phone..................................... 192
ring signal........................................... 198
SIM card............................................. 200
Phone book............................................. 198
Polishing.................................................. 264
Position/parking lamps.............................. 78
Power panorama roof................................ 93
Power seat................................................. 72
Power windows......................................... 89
Puncture, see Tyres................................. 255
Putting calls on hold................................ 198
R
Radar sensor........................................... 153
limitations........................................... 156
Rain sensor................................................ 86
Rear bulbs
location............................................... 235
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 283
evastarck
07 Alphabetical Index
07
284
Rear control panel
audio system...................................... 134
Rearview and door mirrors
compass............................................. 149
door...................................................... 90
electrically retractable........................... 91
heating.................................................. 91
interior................................................... 92
Rear window, defrosting............................ 91
Recirculation............................................ 126
Recommendations during driving............ 204
Recommended child seats, table.............. 33
Recovery.................................................. 223
Refrigerant............................................... 121
Refuelling................................................. 206
fuel cap............................................... 206
fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 206
fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 206
refuelling............................................. 206
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 243
Remote control
programmable.................................... 110
Remote control, see Remote control key. . 42
Remote control key.................................... 42
battery................................................... 43
battery replacement.............................. 47
detachable key blade........................... 42
functions............................................... 43
range..................................................... 44
Remote control system, type approval.... 276
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 91
Resetting the power windows................... 90
Retractable power door mirrors................. 91
Reverse gear inhibitor................................ 98
Rims
cleaning.............................................. 264
Roll-over protection................................... 29
ROPS (Roll Over Protection System)......... 29
ROPS (Roll Over Protection System) (Roll-
over protection).......................................... 29
Rustproofing............................................ 264
S
Safety grille.............................................. 213
Safety mode............................................... 31
Safety net................................................. 211
Seat, see Seats.......................................... 72
Seatbelt
rear seat................................................ 17
seatbelt tensioner................................. 18
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17
Seatbelts.................................................... 16
Seats.......................................................... 72
head restraints, rear.............................. 74
heating................................................ 124
lowering the front backrest................... 72
lowering the rear backrest.................... 74
power seats.......................................... 72
Securing loads (Loading)......................... 210
Service programme................................. 226
Set time interval....................................... 159
Side airbags............................................... 24
Signal input, external............................... 133
SIM card.................................................. 200
SIPS bag decal....................................... 25
SIPS bags.................................................. 24
Soot filter................................................. 209
SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 209
Spare wheel............................................. 255
temporary spare................................. 255
Spin control............................................. 150
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 284
evastarck
07 Alphabetical Index
07
285
Spin control function............................... 150
SRS AIRBAG........................................ 20, 21
SRS system............................................... 19
switch................................................... 22
SST Self Supporting run flat Tyres....... 254
Stability and traction control system....... 150
Stability system........................................ 150
Stains....................................................... 265
Start assistance......................................... 97
Steering force, speed related.................. 151
Steering force level, see Steering force... 151
Steering lock.............................................. 96
Steering wheel........................................... 76
keypad.................. 76, 116, 133, 152, 197
keypad, adaptive cruise control......... 154
steering wheel adjustment.................... 76
Stone chips and scratches...................... 266
Storage spaces in the passenger compart-
ment......................................................... 189
Surround.................................................. 133
Symbols................................................... 150
indicator symbols................................. 66
information symbols............................. 66
warning symbols................................... 66
Symbols and messages
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 165, 171
Distance Alert..................................... 160
Driver Alert Control............................. 174
Lane Departure Warning..................... 177
Symbols and messages in the Adaptive
cruise control........................................... 157
T
Tailgate...................................................... 52
locking/unlocking............................ 43, 51
open...................................................... 52
Temperature
actual temperature............................. 121
Temperature control................................ 125
Testing the alarm system........................... 58
Timer........................................................ 126
Tools........................................................ 255
Total airing function........................... 44, 121
Towball
installation........................................... 218
removal............................................... 220
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 217
Towing..................................................... 222
towing eye.......................................... 222
Towing capacity....................................... 269
Towing equipment................................... 217
specifications...................................... 218
Towing eye............................................... 222
TPMS Tyre Pressure Monitoring........... 253
Trailer....................................................... 216
cable................................................... 216
driving with a trailer............................ 216
snaking............................................... 220
Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 220
Transmission.............................................. 98
Trip computer.......................................... 147
Trip meter.................................................. 69
Type approved, remote control system... 276
Type designation..................................... 267
Tyres
direction of rotation............................ 251
driving characteristics......................... 251
maintenance....................................... 251
pressure.............................................. 261
puncture repair................................... 257
specifications...................................... 261
speed ratings...................................... 261
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 285
evastarck
07 Alphabetical Index
07
286
tread wear indicators.......................... 252
tyre pressure monitoring..................... 253
winter tyres......................................... 252
U
Unlocking
from the inside...................................... 50
from the outside................................... 50
USB, connection...................................... 137
V
Vanity mirror....................................... 81, 191
Ventilation................................................ 122
Vibration damper..................................... 217
W
Warning lamp
adaptive cruise control....................... 153
collision warning system.................... 167
stability and traction control system. . 150
Warning lamps
airbags SRS.......................................... 67
alternator not charging......................... 67
fault in brake system............................ 67
low oil pressure..................................... 67
parking brake applied........................... 67
seatbelt reminder.................................. 67
warning................................................. 67
Warning sound
collision warning system.................... 167
Warning symbol, AIRBAG system............. 19
Warning triangle....................................... 215
Washer fluid, filling................................... 239
Washer nozzles, heated............................. 87
Washers
rear window.......................................... 87
washer fluid, filling.............................. 239
windscreen........................................... 87
Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 89
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 264
Waxing..................................................... 264
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 269
Wheels
changing............................................. 255
installation........................................... 256
rims..................................................... 252
snow chains........................................ 253
spare wheel........................................ 255
Wheels and tyres..................................... 251
Whiplash injury........................................... 27
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 27
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 27
whiplash injury...................................... 27
Windows, rearview and door mirrors......... 89
Windscreen washing.................................. 87
Windscreen wipers.................................... 86
rain sensor............................................ 86
Winter driving........................................... 205
Winter tyres.............................................. 252
Wiper blades............................................ 238
changing............................................. 238
cleaning.............................................. 239
XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 286
evastarck
07 Alphabetical Index
07
287
replacing, rear window....................... 239
service position................................... 238
Wipers and washin
Related manuals for Volvo XC60 2009 Owners Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the XC60 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo XC60 2009 Owners Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo XC60 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo XC60. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Volvo XC60 2009 Owners Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Volvo XC60 2009 Owners Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Volvo XC60 2009 Owners Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Volvo XC60 2009 Owners Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo XC60 2009 Owners Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.